all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | label |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual-1 | Users Manual | 3.97 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual-2 | Users Manual | 3.90 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
User Manual-3 | Users Manual | 3.87 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 4.73 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 1.68 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
ID Label and Location | ID Label/Location Info | 188.43 KiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Agent Designation Attestation | Attestation Statements | 398.79 KiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 743.74 KiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 1.26 MiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Covered List Attestation Letter | Attestation Statements | 156.47 KiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
RF Exposure Report | RF Exposure Info | 490.12 KiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Software Security | SDR Software/Security Inf | October 05 2023 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report Antenna | Test Report | 2.63 MiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report NII | Test Report | 2.06 MiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Setup Photos | Test Setup Photos | 378.90 KiB | October 05 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Block Diagram | Block Diagram | May 26 2023 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Declaration Letter WiFi Channels | Cover Letter(s) | 96.99 KiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 | Operational Description | Operational Description | May 26 2023 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Schematics | Schematics | May 26 2023 | confidential | ||||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report Co-location | Test Report | 1.98 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report DTS | Test Report | 4.76 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report NII-1 | Test Report | 4.45 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report NII-2 | Test Report | 3.44 MiB | May 26 2023 | |||
1 2 3 4 |
|
Test Report JAD | Test Report | 1.06 MiB | May 25 2023 |
1 2 3 4 | User Manual-1 | Users Manual | 3.97 MiB | May 26 2023 |
MAX Series User Manual Pepwave Products:
MAX 700 / HD2 / HD2 IP67 / HD2 Mini / HD2 MBX 5G / HD2 MBX / HD Dome / HD Dome Pro /
HD4 / HD4 MBX 5G / HD4 MBX / MBX Mini / HD4 IP67 / Transit / Transit Duo / Transit 5G /
Transit Core / Transit Mini / Transit Pro E / Transit Duo Pro / BR1 Classic / BR1 MK2 / BR1 Slim
/ BR1 ENT / BR1 M2M / BR1 Mini (HW2) / BR1 Mini (HW3) / BR1 Mini Core / BR1 Mini Core
(HW3) / BR1 ESN / BR1 Pro LTE / BR1 Pro (CAT-20) / BR1 Pro 5G / BR2 Pro / BR1 IP55 / BR1 IP67 / BR2 IP55 / On-The-Go / HD2 with MediaFast / HD4 with MediaFast / SpeedFusion Engine / UBR LTE / UBR Plus / PDX Pepwave Firmware 8.3.1 April 2023 COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice. Copyright 2021 Peplink Pepwave Ltd. All Rights Reserved. Pepwave and the Pepwave logo are trademarks of Peplink International Ltd. Other brands or products mentioned may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. Table of Contents Introduction and Scope Glossary 1 Product Features 1.1 Supported Network Features 1.2 Other Supported Features 2 Pepwave MAX Mobile Router Overview 2.1 MAX 700 2.2 MAX HD2 2.3 MAX HD2 IP67 2.4 MAX HD2 mini 2.5 MAX HD Dome 2.6 MAX HD Dome Pro 2.7 MAX Transit / MAX Transit Duo (CAT-12) 2.8 MAX Transit (CAT-18) 2.9 MAX Transit 5G 2.10 MAX Transit Mini 2.11 MAX Transit Pro E 2.12 MAX Transit Core 2.13 MAX Transit Duo Pro 2.14 MAX BR1 ESN 2.15 MAX HD2 and HD4 with MediaFast 2.16 MAX HD4 2.17 MAX HD4 MBX (CAT-12) 2.18 MAX HD2/4 MBX (CAT-20) 2.19 MAX HD2/4 MBX (5G) 2.20 MAX MBX Mini 2.21 MAX HD4 IP67 2.22 MAX BR1 Classic 2.23 MAX BR1 MK2 2.24 MAX BR1 Slim 2.25 MAX BR1 Mini (HW2) 2.26 MAX BR1 Mini (HW3) 2.27 MAX BR1 Mini Core 8 9 10 10 13 14 14 16 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 29 30 31 33 35 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 49 50 52 53 55 56 https://www.peplink.com 2 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.28 MAX BR1 Mini Core (HW3) 2.29 MAX BR1 M2M 2.30 MAX BR1 ENT 2.31 MAX BR1 Pro 2.32 MAX BR1 Pro (CAT-20) 2.33 MAX BR1 Pro 5G 2.34 MAX BR2 Pro 2.35 MAX Hotspot 2.36 MAX BR1 IP55 2.37 MAX BR2 IP55 2.38 MAX BR1 IP67 2.39 MAX On-The-Go 2.40 SpeedFusion Engine 2.41 UBR LTE 2.42 UBR Plus 2.43 PDX 3 Advanced Feature Summary 3.1 Drop-in Mode and LAN Bypass: Transparent Deployment 3.2 QoS: Clearer VoIP 3.3 Per-User Bandwidth Control 3.4 High Availability via VRRP 3.5 USB Modem and Android Tethering 3.6 Built-In Remote User VPN Support 3.7 SIM-card USSD support 3.8 KVM Virtualization 3.9 DPI Engine 3.10 NetFlow 3.11 Wi-Fi Air Monitoring 3.12 SP Default Configuration 3.13 Peplink Relay 3.14 DNS over HTTPS (DoH) 3.15 Peplink InTouch 3.16 Synergy Mode 3.17 Virtual WAN on VLAN 4 Installation 4.1 Preparation 57 58 59 60 61 63 65 66 67 69 70 71 72 72 74 75 76 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 80 80 80 80 81 81 81 81 82 83 83 https://www.peplink.com 3 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 4.2 Constructing the Network 4.3 Configuring the Network Environment 5 Mounting the Unit 5.1 Wall Mount 5.2 Car Mount 5.3 IP67 Installation Guide 5.4 PDX Accessory Kit Installation Guide 6 Connecting to the Web Admin Interface 7 SpeedFusion Connect Protect 7.1 Activate SpeedFusion Connect Protect 7.2 Enable SpeedFusion Connect Protect 7.3 Route by Cloud Application 7.4 Route by Wi-Fi SSID 7.5 Route by LAN Client 8 Configuring the LAN Interface(s) 8.1 Basic Settings 8.2 Port Settings 8.3 Captive Portal 9 Configuring the WAN Interface(s) 9.1 Ethernet WAN 9.2 Cellular WAN 9.3 Wi-Fi WAN 9.4 WAN Connection Settings (Common) 9.5 WAN Health Check 9.6 Bandwidth Allowance Monitoring 9.7 Additional Public IP address 9.8 Dynamic DNS Settings 10 SpeedFusion VPN 10.1 SpeedFusion VPN 11 IPsec VPN 11.1 IPsec VPN Settings 11.2 GRE Tunnel 12 OpenVPN 83 84 85 85 85 85 86 93 95 95 96 101 102 103 105 105 114 115 119 122 130 136 140 141 144 145 145 147 148 158 158 162 164 https://www.peplink.com 4 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13 Outbound Policy 13.1 Adding Rules for Outbound Policy 14 Port Forwarding 14.1 UPnP / NAT-PMP Settings 15 NAT Mappings 16 Media Fast 16.1 Setting Up MediaFast Content Caching 16.2 Viewing MediaFast Statistics 16.3 Prefetch Schedule 17 Edge Computing 17.1 Configuring the ContentHub 17.2 Configure a website for ContentHub 17.3 Configure an application for ContentHub 18 Docker 19 KVM 20 QoS 20.1 User Groups 20.2 Bandwidth Control 20.3 Application Queue 20.4 Application 21 Firewall 21.1 Access Rules 21.2 Content Blocking 22 Routing Protocols 22.1 OSPF & RIPv2 22.2 BGP 23 Remote User Access 24 Miscellaneous Settings 24.1 High Availability 24.2 RADIUS Server 24.3 Certificate Manager 24.4 Service Forwarding 165 165 175 177 178 180 180 182 183 185 185 185 187 189 190 191 192 193 193 194 196 197 205 207 207 209 214 217 217 221 223 224 https://www.peplink.com 5 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.5 Service Passthrough 24.6 UART 24.7 GPS Forwarding 24.8 Ignition Sensing Ignition Sensing installation GPIO Menu 24.9 NTP Server 24.10 Grouped Networks 24.11 Remote SIM Management 24.12 SIM Toolkit 24.13 UDP Relay 25 AP 25.1 AP Controller 25.2 Wireless SSID 25.3 Wireless Mesh 25.4 Settings 26 AP Controller Status 26.1 Info 26.2 Access Point 26.3 Wireless SSID 26.4 Wireless Client 26.5 Mesh / WDS 26.6 Nearby Device 26.7 Event Log 27 Toolbox 28 System 28.1 Admin Security 28.2 Firmware 28.3 Time 28.4 Schedule 28.5 Email Notification 28.6 Event Log 28.7 SNMP 28.8 SMS Control 28.9 InControl 227 228 230 231 231 233 234 235 236 238 240 240 241 241 247 248 255 255 257 260 261 261 263 263 264 264 265 270 272 273 274 277 278 280 281 https://www.peplink.com 6 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 28.10 Configuration 28.11 Feature Add-ons 28.12 Reboot 29 Tools 29.1 Ping 29.2 Traceroute Test 29.3 Wake-on-LAN 29.4 WAN Analysis 29.5 CLI (Command Line Interface Support) 30 Status 30.1 Device 30.2 GPS Data 30.3 Active Sessions 30.4 Client List 30.5 UPnP / NAT-PMP 30.6 OSPF & RIPv2 30.7 BGP 30.8 SpeedFusion VPN 30.9 Event Log 31 WAN Quality 32 Usage Reports 32.1 Real-Time 32.2 Hourly 32.3 Daily 32.4 Monthly Appendix A: Restoration of Factory Defaults Appendix B: FusionSIM Manual Appendix C: Overview of ports used by Peplink SD-WAN routers and other Peplink services Appendix D: Declaration 282 283 283 283 283 285 285 286 289 289 290 291 293 295 296 297 297 297 302 303 305 305 305 306 307 310 311 323 325 https://www.peplink.com 7 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Introduction and Scope Pepwave routers provide link aggregation and load balancing across multiple WAN connections, allowing a combination of technologies like 3G HSDPA, EVDO, 4G LTE, Wi-Fi, external WiMAX dongle, and satellite to be utilized to connect to the Internet. The MAX wireless SD-WAN router series has a wide range of products suitable for many different deployments and markets. Entry level SD-WAN models such as the MAX BR1 are suitable for SMEs or branch offices. High-capacity SD-WAN routers such as the MAX HD2 are suitable for larger organizations and head offices. This manual covers setting up Pepwave routers and provides an introduction to their features and usage. Want to know more about Pepwave routers? Visit our YouTube Channel for a video introduction !
Tips https://youtu.be/13M-JHRAICA https://www.peplink.com 8 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Glossary The following terms, acronyms, and abbreviations are frequently used in this manual:
Term 3G 4G Definition 3rd generation standards for wireless communications (e.g., HSDPA) 4th generation standards for wireless communications (e.g., LTE) DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DNS Domain Name System EVDO Evolution-Data Optimized FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name HSDPA High-Speed Downlink Packet Access HTTP Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol IP Internet Protocol LAN Local Area Network MAC Address Media Access Control Address MTU MSS NAT Maximum Transmission Unit Maximum Segment Size Network Address Translation PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet QoS Quality of Service SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol TCP UDP VPN Transmission Control Protocol User Datagram Protocol Virtual Private Network VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol WAN Wide Area Network WINS Windows Internet Name Service WLAN Wireless Local Area Network https://www.peplink.com 9 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 1 Product Features Pepwave routers enable all LAN users to share broadband Internet connections, and they provide advanced features to enhance Internet access. Our Max BR wireless routers support multiple SIM cards. They can be configured to switch from using one SIM card to another SIM card according to different criteria, including wireless network reliability and data usage. Our MAX HD series wireless routers are embedded with multiple 4G LTE modems, and allow simultaneous wireless Internet connections through multiple wireless networks. The wireless Internet connections can be bonded together using our SpeedFusion technology. This allows better reliability, larger bandwidth, and increased wireless coverage compared to use only one 4G LTE modem. Below is a list of supported features on Pepwave routers. Features vary by model. For more information, please see peplink.com/products. 1.1 Supported Network Features 1.1.1 WAN Ethernet WAN connection in full/half duplex Static IP support for PPPoE Built-in cellular modems USB mobile connection(s) Wi-Fi WAN connection Network address translation (NAT)/port address translation (PAT) Inbound and outbound NAT mapping IPsec NAT-T and PPTP packet passthrough MAC address clone and passthrough Customizable MTU and MSS values WAN connection health check Dynamic DNS (supported service providers: changeip.com, dyndns.org, no-ip.org, tzo.com and DNS-O-Matic) Ping, DNS lookup, and HTTP-based health check 1.1.2 LAN Wi-Fi AP Ethernet LAN ports DHCP server on LAN https://www.peplink.com 10 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 1.1.3 Extended DHCP option support Static routing rules VLAN on LAN support VPN SpeedFusion VPN with SpeedFusion TM SpeedFusion VPN performance analyzer X.509 certificate support VPN load balancing and failover among selected WAN connections Bandwidth bonding and failover among selected WAN connections IPsec VPN for network-to-network connections (works with Cisco and Juniper) Ability to route Internet traffic to a remote VPN peer Optional pre-shared key setting SpeedFusion TM throughput, ping, and traceroute tests PPTP server PPTP and IPsec passthrough 1.1.4 Firewall Outbound (LAN to WAN) firewall rules Inbound (WAN to LAN) firewall rules per WAN connection Intrusion detection and prevention Specification of NAT mappings Outbound firewall rules can be defined by destination domain name 1.1.5 Captive Portal Splash screen of open networks, login page for secure networks Customizable built-in captive portal Supports linking to outside page for captive portal 1.1.6 Outbound Policy Link load distribution per TCP/UDP service Persistent routing for specified source and/or destination IP addresses per TCP/UDP service Traffic prioritization and DSL optimization Prioritize and route traffic to VPN tunnels with Priority and Enforced algorithms 1.1.7 AP Controller https://www.peplink.com 11 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Configure and manage Pepwave AP devices Review the status of connected APs 1.1.8 QoS Quality of service for different applications and custom protocols User group classification for different service levels Bandwidth usage control and monitoring on group- and user-level Application prioritization for custom protocols and DSL/cable optimization https://www.peplink.com 12 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 1.2 Other Supported Features User-friendly web-based administration interface HTTP and HTTPS support for web admin interface (default redirection to HTTPS) Configurable web administration port and administrator password Firmware upgrades, configuration backups, ping, and traceroute via web admin interface Remote web-based configuration (via WAN and LAN interfaces) Time server synchronization SNMP Email notification Read-only user access for web admin Shared IP drop-in mode Authentication and accounting by RADIUS server for web admin Built-in WINS servers*
Syslog SIP passthrough PPTP packet passthrough Event log Active sessions Client list WINS client list *
UPnP / NAT-PMP Real-time, hourly, daily, and monthly bandwidth usage reports and charts IPv6 support Support USB tethering on Android 2.2+ phones
* Not supported on MAX Surf-On-The-Go, and BR1 variants https://www.peplink.com 13 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2 Pepwave MAX Mobile Router Overview 2.1 MAX 700 2.1.1 Panel Appearance Note:
For proper Wi-Fi performance and operations, please ensure all 4 Wi-Fi antenna connectors (labeled Wi-Fi 1 and Wi-Fi 2) have antennas attached. The LED indicators of Wi-Fi 1 & 2 shown as below is referring to the default settings of Wi-Fi Operation mode is WAN + AP under the AP. https://www.peplink.com 14 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.1.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi 1 OFF ON Wi-Fi AP Indicators WiFi AP is disabled. WiFi AP is enabled. Wi-Fi WAN Indicators Wi-Fi 2 OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Green LED ON 10 / 100/ 1000 Mbps LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 15 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.2 MAX HD2 For certification information, please refer to Appendix B: Declaration Panel Appearance 2.2.1 https://www.peplink.com 16 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.2.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi WAN Wi-Fi WAN Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 /
Cellular 2 OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 17 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.3 MAX HD2 IP67 2.3.1 Panel Appearance 2.3.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 18 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4 MAX HD2 mini 2.4.1 Panel Appearance 2.4.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 /
Cellular 2 OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 19 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Green LED Orange LED LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports ON OFF POE Enabled POE Disabled Blinking 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps and Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.5 MAX HD Dome 2.5.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 20 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 21 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.6 MAX HD Dome Pro 2.6.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 22 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 23 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.7 MAX Transit / MAX Transit Duo (CAT-12) 2.7.1 Panel Appearance 2.7.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 24 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 /
Cellular 2*
OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s)
* For MAX-TST_DUO Wi-Fi OFF Blinking Wi-Fi Indicators Wi-Fi AP is turn off Wi-Fi AP is turn on Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 25 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.8 MAX Transit (CAT-18) 2.8.1 Panel Appearance 2.8.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 26 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 /
Cellular 2*
OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s)
* For MAX-TST_DUO Wi-Fi OFF Blinking Wi-Fi Indicators Wi-Fi AP is turn off Wi-Fi AP is turn on Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 27 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.9 MAX Transit 5G 2.9.1 Panel Appearance 2.9.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 /
Status OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Wi-Fi OFF Blinking Wi-Fi Indicators Wi-Fi AP is turn off Wi-Fi AP is turn on https://www.peplink.com 28 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.10 MAX Transit Mini 2.10.1 Panel Appearance 2.10.2 LED indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi Indicators OFF Disabled intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic https://www.peplink.com 29 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) 2.11 MAX Transit Pro E 2.11.1 Panel Appearance 2.11.2 LED indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready ON OFF LAN 1 Port POE Enabled POE Disabled Blinking 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps and Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Status Green LED Orange LED https://www.peplink.com 30 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports LAN 2-3 Port and Ethernet WAN Port Green LED ON OFF ON 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) 2.12 MAX Transit Core 2.12.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 31 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.12.2 LED indicators Status indicated in the front panel is as follows:
Power LED OFF Power off GREEN Power on LED Indicator LAN 1 Port Green LED ON POE Enabled OFF - POE Disabled Orange LED Blinking 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps with activity OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports LAN 2-3 Ports, WAN Port Right LED GREEN 1000 Mbps OFF 10 / 100 Mbps or ports are not connected ORANGE Port is connected without traffic Left LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Console & USB Ports Console Port Reserved for engineering use USB Ports For connecting 4G/3G USB modems https://www.peplink.com 32 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.13 MAX Transit Duo Pro 2.13.1 Panel Appearance 2.13.2 LED indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 /
Cellular 2*
OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Wi-Fi OFF Blinking Wi-Fi Indicators Wi-Fi AP is turn off Wi-Fi AP is turn on https://www.peplink.com 33 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 34 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.14 MAX BR1 ESN 2.14.1 Panel Appearance 2.14.2 LED indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi Indicators OFF Disabled intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 35 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.15 MAX HD2 and HD4 with MediaFast 2.15.1 Panel Appearance Note:
For proper Wi-Fi performance and operations, please ensure all 4 Wi-Fi antenna connectors (labeled Wi-Fi 1 and Wi-Fi 2) have antennas attached. The LED indicators of Wi-Fi 1 & 2 shown as below is referring to the default settings of Wi-Fi Operation mode is WAN + AP under the AP. For more details, please refer to the section 25.4. 2.15.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 36 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Wi-Fi 1 Wi-Fi WAN Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Wi-Fi 2 OFF ON Wi-Fi AP Indicators WiFi AP is disabled. WiFi AP is enabled. Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 / 2 /
3 / 4 OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED Orange LED ON OFF LAN Ports POE Enabled POE Disabled Blinking 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps and Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Green LED ON OFF ON Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 37 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.16 MAX HD4 2.16.1 Panel Appearance Note:
For proper Wi-Fi performance and operations, please ensure all 4 Wi-Fi antenna connectors (labeled Wi-Fi 1 and Wi-Fi 2) have antennas attached. The LED indicators of Wi-Fi 1 & 2 shown as below is referring to the default settings of Wi-Fi Operation mode is WAN + AP under the AP. For more details, please refer to the section 25.4 https://www.peplink.com 38 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.16.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi 1 OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi WAN Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Wi-Fi 2 OFF ON Wi-Fi AP Indicators WiFi AP is disabled. WiFi AP is enabled. Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 / 2 /
3 / 4 OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED Orange LED ON OFF LAN Ports POE Enabled POE Disabled Blinking 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps and Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Green LED ON 1000 Mbps Ethernet WAN Ports https://www.peplink.com 39 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink OFF ON 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.17 MAX HD4 MBX (CAT-12) For certification information, please refer to Appendix B: Declaration 2.17.1 Panel Appearance Note:
For proper Wi-Fi performance and operations, please ensure all 4 Wi-Fi antenna connectors (labeled Wi-Fi 1 and Wi-Fi 2) have antennas attached. https://www.peplink.com 40 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
The LED indicators of Wi-Fi 1 & 2 shown as below is referring to the default settings of Wi-Fi Operation mode is WAN + AP under the AP. For more details, please refer to the section 25.4 2.17.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi 1 OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi WAN Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Blinking ON Connected to network(s) with traffic Connected to network(s) without traffic Wi-Fi 2 OFF ON Wi-Fi AP Indicators WiFi AP is disabled. WiFi AP is enabled. Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 / 2 /
3 / 4 OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED ON 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 41 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.18 MAX HD2/4 MBX (CAT-20) 2.18.1 Panel Appearance Note:
For proper Wi-Fi performance and operations, please ensure all 4 Wi-Fi antenna connectors (labeled Wi-Fi 1 and Wi-Fi 2) have antennas attached. The LED indicators of Wi-Fi 1 & 2 shown as below is referring to the default settings of Wi-Fi Operation mode is WAN + AP under the AP. For more details, please refer to the section 25.4 2.18.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 42 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Wi-Fi 1 Wi-Fi WAN Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Blinking ON Connected to network(s) with traffic Connected to network(s) without traffic Wi-Fi 2 OFF ON Wi-Fi AP Indicators WiFi AP is disabled. WiFi AP is enabled. Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 / 2 /
3 / 4 OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED ON 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 43 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.19 MAX HD2/4 MBX (5G) 2.19.1 Panel Appearance Note:
For proper Wi-Fi performance and operations, please ensure all 4 Wi-Fi antenna connectors (labeled Wi-Fi 1 and Wi-Fi 2) have antennas attached. The LED indicators of Wi-Fi 1 & 2 shown as below is referring to the default settings of Wi-Fi Operation mode is WAN + AP under the AP. For more details, please refer to the section 25.4 https://www.peplink.com 44 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.19.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi 1 OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi WAN Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Blinking ON Connected to network(s) with traffic Connected to network(s) without traffic Wi-Fi 2 OFF ON Wi-Fi AP Indicators WiFi AP is disabled. WiFi AP is enabled. Cellular Indicators Cellular 1 / 2 /
3 / 4 OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED ON 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 45 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.20 MAX MBX Mini 2.20.1 Panel Appearance Note:
For proper Wi-Fi performance and operations, please ensure all 4 Wi-Fi antenna connectors (labeled Wi-Fi 1 and Wi-Fi 2) have antennas attached. The LED indicators of Wi-Fi 1 & 2 shown as below is referring to the default settings of Wi-Fi Operation mode is WAN + AP under the AP. For more details, please refer to the section 25.4 2.20.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
LED Indicator Power LED OFF Power off GREEN Power on LAN Ports Green LED ON POE Enabled OFF - POE Disabled Orange LED Blinking 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps with activity OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 46 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WAN Ports GREEN 1000 Mbps Right LED ORANGE 100 Mbps OFF 10 Mbps Solid Port is connected without traffic Left LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Wi-Fi 1 Wi-Fi WAN Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Blinking ON Connected to network(s) with traffic Connected to network(s) without traffic Wi-Fi 2 OFF ON Wi-Fi AP Indicators WiFi AP is disabled. WiFi AP is enabled. Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular 1 / 2 Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Console & USB Ports Console Port Reserved for engineering use USB Ports For connecting 4G/3G USB modems https://www.peplink.com 47 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.21 MAX HD4 IP67 2.21.1 Panel Appearance 2.21.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 48 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.22 MAX BR1 Classic For certification information, please refer to Appendix B: Declaration 2.22.1 Panel Appearance 2.22.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 49 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Indicators OFF Disabled intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) 2.23 MAX BR1 MK2 For certification information, please refer to Appendix B: Declaration 2.23.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 50 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.23.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi Indicators OFF Disabled intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 51 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.24 MAX BR1 Slim 2.24.1 Panel Appearance 2.24.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi Indicators OFF Disabled intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 52 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports Green LED ON OFF ON 100 Mbps 10 Mbps Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.25 MAX BR1 Mini (HW2) For certification information, please refer to Appendix B: Declaration 2.25.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 53 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.25.2 LED Indicators Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Indicators OFF Disabled intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic https://www.peplink.com 54 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.26 MAX BR1 Mini (HW3) 2.26.1 Panel Appearance 2.26.2 LED Indicators Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Wi-Fi OFF ON Wi-Fi Indicators Wi-Fi AP is turn off Wi-Fi AP is turn on https://www.peplink.com 55 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.27 MAX BR1 Mini Core 2.27.1 Panel Appearance 2.27.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 56 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.28 MAX BR1 Mini Core (HW3) 2.28.1 Panel Appearance 2.28.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 57 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.29 MAX BR1 M2M 2.29.1 Panel Appearance 2.29.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 58 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports Green LED ON OFF ON 100 Mbps 10 Mbps Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.30 MAX BR1 ENT 2.30.1 Panel Appearance 2.30.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 59 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Green LED ON 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.31 MAX BR1 Pro 2.31.1 Panel Appearance 2.31.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready https://www.peplink.com 60 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking Slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.32 MAX BR1 Pro (CAT-20) 2.32.1 Panel Appearance 2.32.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
https://www.peplink.com 61 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking Slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Wi-Fi / Wi-Fi AP OFF ON Wi-Fi Indicators Disabled intermittent Connected to wireless network(s) Green LED ON OFF ON LAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Right LED ON OFF ON WAN Port 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Left LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 62 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.33 MAX BR1 Pro 5G 2.33.1 Panel Appearance 2.33.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking Slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Wi-Fi / Wi-Fi AP OFF ON Wi-Fi Indicators Disabled intermittent Connected to wireless network(s) Green LED ON OFF LAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected https://www.peplink.com 63 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink ON Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Right LED ON OFF ON WAN Port 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Left LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 64 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.34 MAX BR2 Pro 2.34.1 Panel Appearance 2.34.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking Slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) Wi-Fi / Wi-Fi AP OFF ON Wi-Fi Indicators Disabled intermittent Connected to wireless network(s) Green LED Orange LED ON OFF ON LAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic https://www.peplink.com 65 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Right LED ON OFF ON WAN Port 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Left LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.35 MAX Hotspot 2.35.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 66 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.35.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.36 MAX BR1 IP55 2.36.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 67 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.36.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking red Boot up error Green Ready Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Cellular OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Indicators Blinking Connecting to network(s) in Standby Mode Green Connected to network(s) in Priority 1 (Active) LAN and WAN Indicators Green OFF Powered-on device connected to Ethernet port No device connected to Ethernet port https://www.peplink.com 68 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.37 MAX BR2 IP55 2.37.1 Panel Appearance 2.37.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status Wi-Fi OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy B linking red Boot up error Green Ready Wi-Fi Indicators OFF Disabled Intermittent Blinking slowly Connecting to wireless network(s) Blinking ON Connected to wireless network(s) with traffic Connected to wireless network(s) without traffic Cellular Indicators Cellular OFF ON Disabled or no SIM card inserted Connecting or connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 69 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF Port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports 2.38 MAX BR1 IP67 2.38.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 70 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.39 MAX On-The-Go 2.39.1 Panel Appearance 2.39.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
WAN Wi-Fi Status Green LED Orange LED OFF Green OFF Green OFF Red Green ON OFF ON Cellular Indicators Modem is not attached to the port Modem is attached to the port Wi-Fi Indicators Disconnected from AP Connected to AP Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Ready LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 100 Mbps 10 Mbps Port is connected without traffic Blinking Data is transferring Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports https://www.peplink.com 71 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.40 SpeedFusion Engine 2.40.1 Panel Appearance 2.41 UBR LTE 2.41.1 Panel Appearance https://www.peplink.com 72 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.41.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking Red Boot up error Green Ready Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Cellular Indicators OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Blinking Slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) https://www.peplink.com 73 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.42 UBR Plus 2.42.1 Panel Appearance 2.42.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators System initializing Booting up or busy Blinking Red Boot up error Green Ready Green LED ON OFF ON LAN and Ethernet WAN Ports 1000 Mbps 10 Mbps / 100 Mbps or port is not connected Port is connected without traffic Orange LED Blinking Data is transferring OFF No data is being transferred or port is not connected Port Type Auto MDI/MDI-X ports Cellular OFF Disabled or no SIM card inserted Cellular Indicators https://www.peplink.com 74 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Blinking Slowly Connecting to network(s) Green Connected to network(s) 2.43 PDX 2.43.1 Panel Appearance 2.43.2 LED Indicators The statuses indicated by the front panel LEDs are as follows:
Status OFF Red Status Indicators No battery installed Charging Blinking red Low Battery Green Full Charged https://www.peplink.com 75 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3 Advanced Feature Summary 3.1 Drop-in Mode and LAN Bypass: Transparent Deployment As your organization grows, it may require more bandwidth, but modifying your network can be tedious. In Drop-in Mode , you can conveniently install your Peplink router without making any changes to your network. For any reason your Peplink router loses power, the LAN Bypass will safely and automatically bypass the Peplink router to resume your original network connection. Note: Drop-in mode is compatible for All MAX models except MAX BR1 IP67 3.2 QoS: Clearer VoIP VoIP and videoconferencing are highly sensitive to latency. With QoS, Peplink routers can detect VoIP traffic and assign it the highest priority, giving you crystal-clear calls. https://www.peplink.com 76 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.3 Per-User Bandwidth Control With per-user bandwidth control, you can define bandwidth control policies for up to 3 groups of users to prevent network congestion. Define groups by IP address and subnet, and set bandwidth limits for every user in the group. 3.4 High Availability via VRRP When your organization has a corporate requirement demanding the highest availability with no single point of failure, you can deploy two Peplink routers in High Availability mode . With High Availability mode, the second device will take over when needed. Compatible with: MAX 700, MAX HD2 (All variants), HD4 (All Variants) https://www.peplink.com 77 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.5 USB Modem and Android Tethering For increased WAN diversity, plug in a USB LTE modem as a backup. Peplink routers are compatible with over 200 modem types . You can also tether to smartphones running Android 4.1.X and above. Compatible with: MAX 700, HD2 (all variants except IP67), HD4 (All variants) 3.6 Built-In Remote User VPN Support Use OpenVPN or L2TP with IPsec to safely and conveniently connect remote clients to your private network. L2TP with IPsec is supported by most devices, but legacy devices can also connect using PPTP. Click here for the full instructions on setting up L2TP with IPsec. Click here for the full instructions on setting up OpenVPN connections https://www.peplink.com 78 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.7 SIM-card USSD support Cellular-enabled routers can now use USSD to check their SIM cards balance, process pre-paid cards, and configure carrier-specific services. Click here for full instructions on using USSD 3.8 KVM Virtualization KVM is a virtualisation module that allows administrators using our routers to host a large range of virtual machines. KVM is now supported on some MediaFast / ContentHub routers. Click here for the full instructions on how to set up KVM Click here for the full instructions on how to set up KVM with USB Storage https://www.peplink.com 79 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.9 DPI Engine The DPI report written in the updated KB article will show further information on InControl2 through breaking down application categories into subcategories. https://forum.peplink.com/t/ic2-deep-packet-inspection-dpi-reports-and-everything-you-n eed-to-know-about-it/10151/
3.10 NetFlow NetFlow protocol is used to track network traffic. Tracking information from NetFlow can be sent to the NetFlow collector, which analyzes data and generates reports for review. Note: To enable this feature, go to https://<Device's IP>/cgi-bin/MANGA/support.cgi 3.11 Wi-Fi Air Monitoring Pepwave routers support Wi-Fi Air Monitoring Mode which is used to troubleshoot remotely and proactively monitor Wi-Fi and WAN performance. The report can be viewed under InControl 2 > Reports > AirProbe Reports after enabling Wi-Fi Air Monitoring. Note: To enable this feature, go to https://<Device's IP>/cgi-bin/MANGA/support.cgi 3.12 SP Default Conguration The SP Default Configuration feature written in the updated KB article allows for the provisioning of custom made settings (a.k.a. InControl2 configuration) via the Ethernet LAN port and is ideal for those wanting to do a bulk deployment of many Peplink devices. Note: If you would like to use this feature, please contact your purchase point (Eg.VAD). https://www.peplink.com 80 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.13 Peplink Relay Cloud Service Providers often restrict access to certain applications. With SFC Relay, you can route traffic before going out to the Internet, allowing access to previously restricted applications experienced with the public SpeedFusion Cloud nodes. Available as an add-on for your home router or as an upgradable license to your Peplink router, SFC Relay is sure to impress you and any peers you give access to. https://forum.peplink.com/t/configure-speedfusion-cloud-relay-server-and-client/6215ca9 b017e48e0f3ff2479/
3.14 DNS over HTTPS (DoH) DoH provides the benefits of communicating DNS information over a secure HTTPS connection in an encrypted manner. The protocol offers increased privacy and confidentiality by preventing data interception and man-in-the-middle attacks. 3.15 Peplink InTouch InTouch is Peplinks zero-touch remote network management solution, leveraging InControl 2 and a SpeedFusion Connect (formerly known as SpeedFusion Cloud) data plan. This service extends a network administrators ability to reach any device UI backed by a Peplink/Pepwave router. To configure InTouch, all you need is a valid InControl 2 subscription, a SpeedFusion Connect data plan, and a Peplink/Pepwave router (which requires the latest 8.2.0 firmware). To watch a demonstration and read the FAQ, visit https://www.peplink.com/enterprise-solutions/intouch/
Or learn to configure InTouch at https://youtu.be/zg0iavHGkJw 3.16 Synergy Mode Synergy mode is a cascade multiple devices and combine the number of WANs to a single device virtually. All the WANs on the Synergized Device will appear as native WAN interfaces at the Synergy Controller and it can be managed like the built-in WAN interfaces. https://forum.peplink.com/t/synergy-mode-(firmware-8.3.0)/639be7d8af8c71a6f3050323/
https://www.peplink.com 81 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3.17 Virtual WAN on VLAN The Virtual WAN Activation License allows you to create 1 x virtual WAN on a particular VLAN, on either WAN or LAN interface. This means that you can create a virtual WAN on VLAN for a WAN port, or a virtual WAN on VLAN for a LAN port. https://forum.peplink.com/t/b20x-virtual-wan-activation-license-faq/6204bac7d90b9e6355e96e8 d/1 https://www.peplink.com 82 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 4 Installation The following section details connecting Pepwave routers to your network. 4.1 Preparation Before installing your Pepwave router, please prepare the following as appropriate for your installation:
At least one Internet/WAN access account and/or Wi-Fi access information Depending on network connection type(s), one or more of the following:
Ethernet WAN : A 10/100/1000BaseT UTP cable with RJ45 connector USB : A USB modem Embedded modem : A SIM card for 5G/4G LTE service Wi-Fi WAN : Wi-Fi antennas A computer installed with the TCP/IP network protocol and a supported web browser. Supported browsers include Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 or above, Mozilla Firefox 24 or above, Apple Safari 7 or above, and Google Chrome 18 or above. 4.2 Constructing the Network At a high level, construct the network according to the following steps:
1. 2. With an Ethernet cable, connect a computer to one of the LAN ports on the Pepwave router. Repeat with different cables for up to 4 computers to be connected. Connect either another Ethernet cable or a USB modem to one of the WAN ports or USB ports respectively, or connect to Wi-Fi as WAN on the Pepwave router. Repeat the same process for any additional WAN ports. 3. Connect the power adapter to the power connector on the rear panel of the Pepwave router, and then plug it into a power outlet. https://www.peplink.com 83 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 4.3 Conguring the Network Environment To ensure that the Pepwave router works properly in the LAN environment and can access the Internet via WAN connections, please refer to the following setup procedures:
LAN configuration For basic configuration, refer to Section 8, Connecting to the Web Admin Interface . For advanced configuration, go to Section 9, Configuring the LAN Interface(s) . WAN configuration For basic configuration, refer to Section 8, Connecting to the Web Admin Interface . For advanced configuration, go to Section 9.2, Captive Portal . https://www.peplink.com 84 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 5 Mounting the Unit 5.1 Wall Mount The Pepwave MAX 700/HD2/On-The-Go can be wall mounted using screws. After adding the screw on the wall, slide the MAX in the screw hole socket as indicated below. Recommended screw specification: M3.5 x 20mm, head diameter 6mm, head thickness 2.4mm. The Pepwave MAX BR1 requires four screws for wall mounting. 5.2 Car Mount The Pepwave MAX700/HD2 can be mounted in a vehicle using the included mounting brackets. Place the mounting brackets by the two sides and screw them onto the device. 5.3 IP67 Installation Guide Installation instructions for IP67 devices can be found here:
http://download.peplink.com/manual/IP67_Installation_Guide.pdf https://www.peplink.com 85 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 5.4 PDX Accessory Kit Installation Guide 5.4.1 Battery Set appearance Step 1: Lock the battery set in the slot with 2 pcs M3 screws. Step 2: Plug power cable into the socket https://www.peplink.com 86 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink STEP 3: Lock the slot cover with 4 pcs M3 screws. https://www.peplink.com 87 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 5.4.2 SFE-DUO Set appearance STEP 1: Assemble SMA cables to the device STEP 2: Assemble bracket to the device https://www.peplink.com 88 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink STEP 3: Assemble SMA connectors to the bracket https://www.peplink.com 89 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink STEP 4: Lock the SFE-Duo set in the slot with 2 pcs M3 screws. https://www.peplink.com 90 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink STEP 5: Connect DC power & ETH port STEP 6: Lock the slot cover with 4 pcs M3 screws. https://www.peplink.com 91 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 0 https://www.peplink.com 92 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 6 1. 2. Connecting to the Web Admin Interface Start a web browser on a computer that is connected with the Pepwave router through the LAN. To connect to the routers web admin interface, enter the following LAN IP address in the address field of the web browser:
http://192.168.50.1
(This is the default LAN IP address for Pepwave routers.) 3. Enter the following to access the web admin interface. Username : admin Password : admin
(This is the default username and password for Pepwave routers). You must change the default password on the first successful logon. Password requirements are: A minimum of 10 lower AND upper case characters, including at least 1 number. When HTTP is selected, the URL will be redirected to HTTPS by default. https://www.peplink.com 93 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After successful login, the Dashboard of the web admin interface will be displayed. The Dashboard shows current WAN, LAN, and Wi-Fi AP statuses. Here, you can change WAN connection priority and switch on/off the Wi-Fi AP. For further information on setting up these connections, please refer to Sections 8 and 9 . Device Information displays details about the device, including model name, firmware version, and uptime. For further information, please refer to Section 22 . Important Note Configuration changes (e.g. WAN, LAN, admin settings, etc.) will take effect only after clicking the Save button at the bottom of each page. The Apply Changes button causes the changes to be saved and applied. https://www.peplink.com 94 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 7 SpeedFusion Connect Protect With Pepwave products, your device is able to connect to SpeedFusion Connect Protect without the use of a second endpoint. This service has wide access to a number of SpeedFusion endpoints hosted from around the world, providing your device with unbreakable connectivity wherever you are.*
*SpeedFusion Connect Protect is supported in firmware version 8.1.0 and above. SpeedFusion Connect is a subscription basis. SpeedFusion Connect Protect license can be purchased at https://estore.peplink.com/ > SpeedFusion Service > SpeedFusion Connect Protect . 7.1 Activate SpeedFusion Connect Protect All Care plans now come with SpeedFusion Connect Protect included. This data allowance will automatically begin and end in accordance with your warranty. No activation is required. https://www.peplink.com 95 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 7.2 Enable SpeedFusion Connect Protect Access the Web Admin of the device you want to create as the Peplink Relay Server, navigating to the SFC Protect tab. To setup a Peplink Relay Mode, select Relay Mode - for Inbound accesses " > Choose the SFC Protect Location you wish to connect to > Click on the Green tick button to confirm the change. https://www.peplink.com 96 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The Relay Sharing Code will be generated, and other peers can use this code to establish a SpeedFusion Connect Protect that will forward the traffics to this device, allowing them to access local networks and the internet via your WAN connection. To connect to SpeedFusion Connect Protect, you can select a SFC Protect Location of your choice, or simply and Automatic then the device will establish connection to the neareset SFC Protect server. Choose Automatic > Click on the green tick button to confirm the change. Or you may select Home Sharing and use your Relay Sharing Code to create a profile if you have set up a Peplink Relay Client on another device. https://www.peplink.com 97 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click on Apply Changes to save the change . By default, the router will build a SpeedFusion tunnel to the SpeedFusion Cloud. If you are running a latency sensitive service like video streaming or VOIP, a WAN Smoothing sub-tunnel can be created. Navigate to Navigate to SFC Protect > Client Mode - for Outbound accesses > SFC . https://www.peplink.com 98 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink A SpeedFusion Connect Protect Profile configuration window will pop out. Click on the + sign to create the WAN Smoothing sub-tunnel. Click on Save and Apply Changes to save the configuration. Now, the router has 2 Speedfusion tunnels to the SpeedFusion Connect Protect. https://www.peplink.com 99 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Create an outbound policy to steer the internet traffic to go into SFC Protect. Please go to Advanced > Outbound Policy , click on Add Rule to create a new outbound policy. https://www.peplink.com 100 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 7.3 Route by Cloud Application Optimize Cloud Application allows you to route Internet traffic through SpeedFusion Connect Protect based on the application. Go to SFC Protect > Route by Cloud Application . Select a Cloud application to route through SpeedFusion Connect Protect from the drop down list > Click
> Save > Apply Changes. Click the Connect Protect. to remove a selected Cloud application from routing through SpeedFusion https://www.peplink.com 101 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 7.4 Route by Wi-Fi SSID SpeedFusion Connect Protect provides a convenient way to route the Wi-Fi client to the cloud from SFC Protect > Route by Wi-Fi SSID . Create a new SSID for SFC Protect. The new SSID will inherit all settings from one of the existing SSIDs including the Security Policy. Then click Save followed by Apply Changes . https://www.peplink.com 102 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SFC Protect SSID will be shown on Dashboard . 7.5 Route by LAN Client SpeedFusion Connect Protect provides a convenient way to route the LAN client to the cloud from SFC Protect > Route by LAN Client . Choose a client from the drop down list > Click + > Save > Apply Changes. https://www.peplink.com 103 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 104 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 8 Conguring the LAN Interface(s) 8.1 Basic Settings LAN interface settings are located at Network > LAN > Network Settings . Navigating to that page will show the following dashboard:
This represents the LAN interfaces that are active on your router (including VLAN). A gray X means that the VLAN is used in other settings and cannot be deleted. You can find which settings are using the VLAN by hovering over the gray X. Alternatively, a red X means that there are no settings using the VLAN. You can delete that VLAN by clicking the red X Clicking on any of the existing LAN interfaces (or creating a new one) will show the following :
IP Address The IP address and subnet mask of the Pepwave router on the LAN. IP Settings Network Settings Name Enter a name for the LAN. VLAN ID Enter a number for your VLAN Inter-VLAN routing Check this box to enable routing between virtual LANs. https://www.peplink.com 105 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Layer 2 SpeedFusion VPN Bridging SpeedFusion VPN Profiles to Bridge The remote network of the selected SpeedFusion VPN profiles will be bridged with this local LAN, creating a Layer 2 SpeedFusion VPN, they will be connected and operate like a single LAN, and any broadcast or multicast packets will be sent over the VPN. Spanning Tree Protocol Click the box will enable STP for this layer 2 profile bridge. Click on the question Mark if you want to enable DHCP Option 82. DHCP Option 82 This allows the device to inject Option 82 with Router Name information before forwarding the DHCP Request packet to a SpeedFusion VPN peer, such that the DHCP Server can identify where the request originates from. Override IP Address when bridge connected Select "Do not override" if the LAN IP address and local DHCP server should remain unchanged after the Layer 2 SpeedFusion VPN is up. If you choose to override the IP address when the VPN is connected, the device will not act as a router, and most Layer 3 routing functions will cease to work. https://www.peplink.com 106 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DHCP Server Settings When this setting is enabled, the Pepwave routers DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address to each computer that is connected via LAN and configured to obtain an IP address via DHCP. The Pepwave routers DHCP server can prevent IP address collisions on the LAN. DHCP Server To enable DHCP bridge relay, please click the icon on this menu item. DHCP Server Logging Enable logging of DHCP events in the eventlog by selecting the checkbox. IP Range These settings allocate a range of IP addresses that will be assigned to LAN computers by the Pepwave routers DHCP server. Lease Time This setting specifies the length of time throughout which an IP address of a DHCP client remains valid. Upon expiration of Lease Time , the assigned IP address will no longer be valid and the IP address assignment must be renewed. DNS Servers This option allows you to input the DNS server addresses to be offered to DHCP clients. If Assign DNS server automatically is selected, the Pepwave routers built-in DNS server address (i.e., LAN IP address) will be offered. BOOTP Check this box to enable BOOTP on older networks that still require it. Extended DHCP Option DHCP Reservation In addition to standard DHCP options (e.g. DNS server address, gateway address, subnet mask), you can specify the value of additional extended DHCP options, as defined in RFC 2132. With these extended options enabled, you can pass additional configuration information to LAN hosts. To define an extended DHCP option, click the Add button, choose the option to define, and then enter its value. For values that are in IP address list format, you can enter one IP address per line in the provided text area input control. Each option can be defined once only. This setting reserves the assignment of fixed IP addresses for a list of computers on the LAN. The computers to be assigned fixed IP addresses on the LAN are identified by their MAC addresses. The fixed IP address assignment is displayed as a cross-reference list between the computers names, MAC addresses, and fixed IP addresses. Name (an optional field) allows you to specify a name to represent the device. MAC addresses should be in the format of 00:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE . Press to create a new record. Press to remove a record. Reserved clients information can be imported from the Client List , located at Status>Client List . For more details, please refer to Section 22.3. https://www.peplink.com 107 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To configure DHCP relay, first click the display the settings. button found next to the DHCP Server option to DHCP Relay Settings Enable Check this box to turn on DHCP relay. Click the icon to disable DHCP relay. DHCP Server IP Address Enter the IP addresses of one or two DHCP servers in the provided fields. The DHCP servers entered here will receive relayed DHCP requests from the LAN. For active-passive DHCP server configurations, enter active and passive DHCP server relay IP addresses in DHCP Server 1 and DHCP Server 2. DHCP Option 82 DHCP Relay Logging DHCP Option 82 includes device information as relay agent for the attached client when forwarding DHCP requests from client to server. This option also embeds the devices MAC address and network name in circuit and remote IDs. Check this box to enable DHCP Option 82. Enable logging of DHCP Relay events in the eventlog by selecting the checkbox. Once DHCP is set up, configure LAN Physical Settings , Static Route Settings , and DNS Proxy Settings as noted above. Static Route Static Route Settings This table is for defining static routing rules for the LAN segment. A static route consists of the network address, subnet mask, and gateway address. The address and subnet mask values are in w.x.y.z format. The local LAN subnet and subnets behind the LAN will be advertised to the VPN. Remote routes sent over the VPN will also be accepted. Any VPN member will be able to route to the local subnets. Press to create a new route. Press to remove a route. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right hand corner of the Static Route section to activate and configure Virtual Network Mapping to resolve network address conflict with remote peers. https://www.peplink.com 108 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink In case of a network address conflict with remote peers (i.e. SpeedFusion VPN / IPsec VPN / IP Forwarding WAN are considered as remote connections), you can define Virtual Network Mapping to resolve it. Note: OSPF & RIPv2 settings should be updated as well to avoid advertising conflicted networks . For further details on virtual network mapping watch this video:
https://youtu.be/C1FMdZCn3Z8 Virtual Network Mapping One-to-One NAT Every IP Address in the Local Network has a corresponding unique Virtual IP Address for NAT. Traffic originating from the Local Network to remote connections will be SNAT'ed and behave like coming from the defined Virtual Network. While traffic initiated by remote peers to the Virtual Network will be DNAT'ed accordingly. Many-to-One NAT The subnet range defined in Local Network will be mapped to a single Virtual IP Address for NAT. Traffic can only be initiated from local to remote, and these traffic will be NAT'ed and behaves like coming from the same Virtual IP Address. https://www.peplink.com 109 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DNS Proxy Settings Enable To enable the DNS proxy feature, check this box, and then set up the feature at Network > LAN > DNS Proxy Settings . A DNS proxy server can be enabled to serve DNS requests originating from LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusion TM peers. Requests are forwarded to the DNS servers/resolvers defined for each WAN connection. DNS Caching This field is to enable DNS caching on the built-in DNS proxy server. When the option is enabled, queried DNS replies will be cached until the records TTL has been reached. This feature can help improve DNS lookup time. However, it cannot return the most up-to-date result for those frequently updated DNS records. By default, DNS Caching is disabled. Include Google Public DNS Servers When this option is enabled , the DNS proxy server will also forward DNS requests to Google's Public DNS Servers , in addition to the DNS servers defined in each WAN. This could increase the DNS service's availability. This setting is disabled by default. Local DNS Records This table is for defining custom local DNS records. A static local DNS record consists of a host name and IP address. When looking up the host name from the LAN to LAN IP of the Pepwave router, the corresponding IP address will be returned. Press to create a new record. Press to remove a record. Domain Lookup Policy DNS Proxy will lookup the domain names defined in this table using the specified connections only. https://www.peplink.com 110 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This field specifies which DNS servers can receive forwarded DNS requests. If no DNS server is selected, then all of them will be selected by default. DNS Resolvers A If you wish to select a SpeedFusion VPN peer, enter the IP address(es) of the VPN peer's DNS server. Incoming queries will be forwarded to one of the selected servers. If none of the selected servers can be reached, then the router will forward incoming queries to all servers with healthy WAN connections. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right hand corner to activate. Finally, if needed, configure Bonjour forwarding, Apples zero configuration networking protocol. Once VLAN configuration is complete, click Save to store your changes. Bonjour Forwarding Settings Enable Check this box to turn on Bonjour forwarding. Bonjour Service Choose Service and Client networks from the drop-down menus, and then click to add the networks. To delete an existing Bonjour listing, click
. https://www.peplink.com 111 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Drop-In Mode Drop-in mode (or transparent bridging mode) eases the installation of the Pepwave MAX on a live network between the firewall and router, such that changes to the settings of existing equipment are not required. The following diagram illustrates drop-in mode setup:
Check the box Enable to enable the Drop-in Mode. After enabling this feature and selecting the WAN for Drop-in mode, various settings including the WAN's connection method and IP address will be automatically updated. When drop-in mode is enabled, the LAN and the WAN for drop-in mode ports will be bridged. Traffic between the LAN hosts and WAN router will be forwarded between the devices. In this case, the hosts on both sides will not notice any IP or MAC address changes. After successfully setting up the Pepwave MAX as part of the network using drop-in mode, it will, depending on model, support one or more WAN connections. Some MAX units also support multiple WAN connections after activating drop-in mode, though a SpeedFusion license may be required to activate more than one WAN port. Please note the Drop-In Mode is mutually exclusive with VLAN. https://www.peplink.com 112 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Drop-in Mode Settings Enable Drop-in mode eases the installation of the Pepwave MAX on a live network between the existing firewall and router, such that no configuration changes are required on existing equipment. Check the box to enable the drop-in mode feature. WAN for Drop-In Mode Select the WAN port to be used for drop-in mode. If WAN is selected, the high availability feature will be disabled automatically. Shared Drop-In IP A When this option is enabled, the passthrough IP address will be used to connect to WAN hosts (email notification, remote syslog, etc.). The MAX will listen for this IP address when WAN hosts access services provided by the MAX (web admin access from the WAN, DNS server requests, etc.). To connect to hosts on the LAN (email notification, remote syslog, etc.), the default gateway address will be used. The MAX will listen for this IP address when LAN hosts access services provided by the MAX (web admin access from the WAN, DNS proxy, etc.). https://www.peplink.com 113 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Shared IP Address A Access to this IP address will be passed through to the LAN port if this device is not serving the service being accessed. The shared IP address will be used in connecting to hosts on the WAN (e.g., email notification, remote syslog, etc.) The device will also listen on the IP address when hosts on the WAN access services served on this device (e.g., web admin accesses from WAN, DNS server, etc.) WAN Default Gateway WAN DNS Servers Enter the WAN router's IP address in this field. If there are more hosts in addition to the router on the WAN segment, click the button next to WAN Default Gateway and check the other host(s) on the WAN segment box and enter the IP address of the hosts that need to access LAN devices or be accessed by others. Enter the selected WAN's corresponding DNS server IP addresses. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. 8.2 Port Settings To configure port settings, navigate to Network > Port Settings On this screen, you can enable specific ports, as well as determine the speed of the LAN ports, whether each port is a trunk or access port, can well as which VLAN each link belongs to, if any. https://www.peplink.com 114 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 8.3 Captive Portal The captive portal serves as a gateway that clients have to pass if they wish to access the internet using your router. To configure, navigate to Network > LAN > Captive Portal . Name Enable Captive Portal Settings Enter the name for the Captive Portal. Check Enable and then, optionally, select the LANs/VLANs that will use the captive portal. Hostname To customize the portals form submission and redirection URL, enter a new URL in this field. To reset the URL to factory settings, click Default . https://www.peplink.com 115 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Access Mode Click Open Access to allow clients to freely access your router. Click User Authentication to force your clients to authenticate before accessing your router. Select External Server to use the Captive Portal with a HotSpot system. As described in the following knowledgebase article:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/using-hotspotsystem-wi-fi-on-pepwave-max-routers/
When selecting the User Authentication in the Access Mode field, you will see the available option for the Authentication via drop-down list:
RADIUS Server Authentication LDAP Server Fill in the necessary information to complete your connection to the server and enable authentication. External Server When selecting the External Server in the Access Mode field, you will see the available option for the Service Type via drop-down list:
CoovaChilli https://www.peplink.com 116 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink HotspotSystem Fill in the necessary information to complete your connection to the server and enable authentication. Access Quota Set a time and data cap to each users Internet usage. Quota Reset Time This menu determines how your usage quota resets. Setting it to Daily will reset it at a specified time every day. Setting a number of minutes after quota reached establish a timer for each user that begins after the quota has been reached. Inactive Timeout Clients will get disconnected when the inactive the configured time is reached. Default 0: no timeout Allowed Networks Add networks that can bypass the captive Portal in this field. To whitelist a network, enter the domain name / IP address here and click
. To delete an existing network from the list of allowed networks, click the button next to the listing. Allowed Clients Add MAC address and /or IP addresses for client devices that are allowed to bypass the Captive Portal. Clients accessing these domains and IP addresses will not be redirected to the splash page. Splash Page Here, you can choose between using the Pepwave routers built-in captive portal and redirecting clients to a URL you define. Popup Handling Configurable options for popup handling:
- Bypass Popup (Redirection only takes place on normal browser)
- Automatically show splash page on Safari for Apple (iOS / macOS) devices Logout Hostname A hostname that can be used to logout captive portal when being accessed on browser. Customize splash page Click on the provided link in the Captive portal profile to customize the splash page. A new browser tab is opened with a WYSIWYG editor of the splash page o edit the content, click on the corresponding element after switching Edit Mode to ON. https://www.peplink.com 117 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 118 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9 Conguring the WAN Interface(s) WAN Interface settings are located at Network > WAN . To reorder WAN priority, drag on the appropriate WAN by holding the left mouse button, move it to the desired priority (the first one would be the highest priority, the second one would be lower priority, and so on), and drop it by releasing the mouse button. To able a particular WAN connection, drag on the appropriate WAN by holding the left mouse button, move it the Disabled row, and drop it by releasing the mouse button. You can also set priorities on the Dashboard . Click the WAN button in the corresponding row to modify the connection setting. Connection details will be changed and become effective immediately after clicking the Save and Apply button. Important Note https://www.peplink.com 119 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink IPv6 You can also enable IPv6 support in this section. DNS over HTTPS (DoH) You can enable DoH (DNS over HTTPS) support in this section. DNS over HTTPS Enable When this option is enabled, the DNS proxy server will use HTTPS connections to forward DNS requests to the DoH resolver; it will not fallback to traditional UDP DNS options. Server The options to configure DoH with a predefined server are:
Cloudflare - The DNS server IP addresses for Cloudflare will be using 1.1.1.1, which is unfiltered. Quad9 - The DNS server IP addresses for Quad9 will be using 9.9.9.9 and 142.112.112.112, which is malware blocking and DNSSEC. Google DNS - The DNS server IP using 8.8.8.8 and 8.8.4.4, which is RFC8484 standard. OpenDNS - The DNS server IP addresses for OpenDNS will be using 208.67.222.222 and 208.67.220.220, which is standard DNS. Custom URL - You may select Custom URL: , and enter the resolver URL and IP address . addresses for Google DNS will be https://www.peplink.com 120 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WAN Quality Monitoring This settings advice how WAN Quality information is being gathered. By default, WAN Quality will always be observed and gathered automatically. With customized choice of WAN connections, the device will always observe WAN Quality of those selected WAN connections. Other WAN connections may stop observing WAN Quality information if it is not necessary for the underlying features. Synergy Mode You can enable the Synergy Controller in this section. You may click this to enable the Synergy Controller. By default, the setting is disabled. You may select the WAN connection to use as a Synegy Link which will connect to synergized devices. https://www.peplink.com 121 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.1 Ethernet WAN There are four possible connection methods for the Ethernet WAN connection:
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. DHCP Static IP PPPoE L2TP GRE 9.1.1 DHCP Connection The DHCP connection method is suitable if the ISP provides an IP address automatically using DHCP (e.g., satellite modem, WiMAX modem, cable, Metro Ethernet, etc.). DHCP Connection Settings WAN Connection Name Enter a name to represent this WAN connection. Enable This setting enables the WAN connection. If schedules have been defined, you will be able to select a schedule to apply to the connection. https://www.peplink.com 122 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Connection Priority This option allows you to configure the WAN connection whether for normal daily usage or as a backup connection only. If Always-on is chosen, the WAN connection will be kept on continuously, regardless of the priority of other WAN connections. If Backup is chosen, the WAN connection will depend on other WAN connections. It will not be used when one or more higher priority dependent WAN connections are connected. Independent from Backup WANs If this is checked, the connection will be working independent from other Backup WAN connections. Those in Backup Priority will ignore the status of this WAN connection, and will be used when none of the other higher priority connections are available. Routing Mode Management IP Address Custom Hostname NAT allows substituting the real address in a packet with a mapped address that is routable on the destination network. By clicking the help field, you can display the IP Forwarding option, if your network requires it. icon in this Management IP Address is available for configuration when you click her e for other DHCP settings. This option allows you to configure the management IP address for the DHCP WAN connection. If your service provider's DHCP server requires you to supply a hostname value upon acquiring an IP address, you may enter the value here. If your service provider does not provide you with the value, you can safely bypass this option. Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. DNS Servers Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers being assigned by the WAN DHCP server to be used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned from the DHCP server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 fields. https://www.peplink.com 123 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When this IP Passthrough option is active, after the ethernet WAN connection is up, the router's DHCP server will offer the connection's IP address to one LAN client. All incoming or outgoing traffic will be routed without NAT. IP Passthrough Regardless the WAN connection's state, the router always binds to the LAN IP address (Default: 192.168.50.1). So when the ethernet WAN is connected, the LAN client could access the router's web admin by manually configuring its IP address to the same subnet as the router's LAN IP address (e.g. 192.168.50.10). Note: when this option is firstly enabled, the LAN client may not be able to refresh its IP address to the ethernet WAN IP address in a timely fashion. The LAN client may have to manually renew its IP address from DHCP server. After this option is enabled, the DHCP lease time will be 2 minutes. I.e. the LAN client could refresh its IP address and access the network at most one minute after the ethernet WAN connection goes up. This option allows you to choose whether to remain connected when this WAN connection is no longer in the highest priority and has entered the standby state. When Remain connected is chosen, upon bringing up this WAN connection to active, it will be immediately available for use. Standby State If this WAN connection is charged by connection time, you may want to set this option to Disconnect so that connection will be made only when needed. Reply to ICMP PING SpeedFusion VPN may use connected standby WAN for failover if link failure detected on the higher priority WAN, you can set this option to Disconnect to avoid data passing through. If the checkbox is unticked , this option is disabled and the system will not reply to any ICMP ping echo requests to the WAN IP addresses of this WAN connection. Default: ticked (Yes) This field refers to the maximum upload speed. Upload Bandwidth This value is referenced when default weight is chosen for outbound traffic and traffic prioritization. A correct value can result in effective traffic prioritization and efficient use of upstream bandwidth. Download Bandwidth This field refers to the maximum download speed. Default weight control for outbound traffic will be adjusted according to this value. https://www.peplink.com 124 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.1.2 Static IP Connection The Static IP connection method is suitable if your ISP provides a static IP address to connect directly. Static IP Settings Routing Mode IP Address /
Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway NAT allows substituting the real address in a packet with a mapped address that is routable on the destination network. By clicking the help icon in this field, you can display the IP Forwarding option, if your network requires it. These settings allow you to specify the information required in order to communicate on the Internet via a fixed Internet IP address. The information is typically determined by and can be obtained from the ISP. Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. DNS Servers Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers being assigned by the WAN DHCP server to be used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned from the DHCP server. When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 fields. https://www.peplink.com 125 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.1.3 PPPoE Connection The PPPoE connection method is suitable if your ISP provides a login ID/password to connect via PPPoE. PPPoE Settings Routing Mode NAT allows substituting the real address in a packet with a mapped address that is routable on the destination network. By clicking the help icon in this field, you can display the IP Forwarding option, if your network requires it. PPPoE Username /
Password Enter the required information in these fields in order to connect via PPPoE to the ISP. The parameter values are determined by and can be obtained from the ISP. Confirm PPPoE Password Service Name
(Optional) Verify your password by entering it again in this field. Service name is provided by the ISP. Note: Leave this field blank unless it is provided by your ISP. IP Address
(Optional) If your ISP provides a PPPoE IP address, enter it here. Note: Leave this field blank unless it is provided by your ISP. Keep Alive Interval This is the time interval between each Keep-Alive packet. Keep-Alive Retry This is the number of consecutive Keep-Alive check failures before treating PPPoE connection as down. DNS Servers Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. https://www.peplink.com 126 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers being assigned by the WAN DHCP server to be used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned from the DHCP server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 fields. 9.1.4 L2TP Connection L2TP has all the compatibility and convenience of PPTP with greater security. Combine this with IPsec for a good balance between ease of use and security. L2TP Settings Routing Mode NAT allows substituting the real address in a packet with a mapped address that is routable on the destination network. By clicking the help icon in this field, you can display the IP Forwarding option, if your network requires it. L2TP Username /
Password Enter the required information in these fields in order to connect via L2TP to your ISP. The parameter values are determined by and can be obtained from your ISP. Confirm L2TP Password Verify your password by entering it again in this field. Server IP Address / Host L2TP server address is a parameter which is provided by your ISP. Note: Leave this field blank unless it is provided by your ISP . Address Type Your ISP will also indicate whether the server IP address is Dynamic or Static. Please click the appropriate value. https://www.peplink.com 127 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. DNS Servers Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers assigned by the PPPoE server to be used for outbound DNS lookups over the WAN connection.
(The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned from the PPPoE server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you can enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1 and DNS server 2 fields. 9.1.5 GRE Connection This connection method is suitable if your ISP provides a static WAN IP and Tunnel IP via GRE. GRE Settings Routing Mode NAT allows substituting the real address in a packet with a mapped address that is routable on the destination network. By clicking the help icon in this field, you can display the IP Forwarding option, if your network requires it. WAN IP Address
/ Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway These settings allow you to specify the information required in order to communicate on the Internet via a fixed Internet IP address. The information is typically determined by and can be obtained from the ISP. Remote GRE Host This field allows you to enter the IP address of the remote GRE. https://www.peplink.com 128 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Tunnel Local IP Address Tunnel Remote IP Address Outgoing NAT IP Address This field allows you to enter the IP address of the local tunnel for the GRE tunnel connection. This field allows you to enter the IP address of the remote tunnel for the GRE tunnel connection. This field is to enter the NAT IP address for outgoing via GRE tunnel. Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. DNS Servers Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers assigned by the PPPoE server to be used for outbound DNS lookups over the WAN connection.
(The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned from the PPPoE server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you can enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1 and DNS server 2 fields. https://www.peplink.com 129 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.2 Cellular WAN To access/configure the Cellular WAN settings, click Network > Cellular Name . You may click the No IP Address link to view the Cellular WAN details/status. WAN Connection Status IMSI ICCID MTN MEID IMEI This is the International Mobile Subscriber Identity which uniquely identifies the SIM card. This is applicable to 3G modems only. This is a unique number assigned to a SIM card used in a cellular device. Thi field is to display the mobile telephone number of the SIM card. Some Pepwave routers support both HSPA and EV-DO. For Sprint or Verizon Wireless EV-DO users, a unique MEID identifier code (in hexadecimal format) is used by the carrier to associate the EV-DO device with the user. This information is presented in hex and decimal format. This is the unique ID for identifying the modem in GSM/HSPA mode. https://www.peplink.com 130 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WAN Connection Settings Indicate a name you wish to give this Cellular WAN connection WAN Connection Name Enable Click the checkbox to toggle the on and off state of this connection. Connection Priority This option allows you to configure the WAN connection whether for normal daily usage or as a backup connection only. If Always-on is chosen, the WAN connection will be kept on continuously, regardless of the priority of other WAN connections. If Backup is chosen, the WAN connection will depend on other WAN connections. It will not be used when one or more higher priority dependent WAN connections are connected. Independent from Backup WANs If this is checked, the connection will be working independent from other Backup WAN connections. Those in Backup Priority will ignore the status of this WAN connection, and will be used when none of the other higher priority connections are available. Routing Mode This option allows you to select the routing method to be used in routing IP frames via the WAN connection. The mode can be either NAT (Network Address Translation) or IP Forwarding. In the case if you need to choose IP Forwarding for your scenario. Click the https://www.peplink.com 131 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink button to enable IP Forwarding. Management IP Address Management IP Address is available for configuration when you click here for other DHCP settings. This option allows you to configure the management IP address for the DHCP WAN connection. DNS Servers Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS lookup is routed through this connection. Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS servers assigned by the WAN DHCP server being used for outbound DNS lookups over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP address assigned by the DHCP server.) When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may enter custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1 and DNS server 2 fields. When this IP Passthrough option is active, after the cellular WAN connection is up, the router's DHCP server will offer the connection's IP address to one LAN client. All incoming or outgoing traffic will be routed without NAT. IP Passthrough Regardless the WAN connection's state, the router always binds to the LAN IP address (Default: 192.168.50.1). So when the cellular WAN is connected, the LAN client could access the router's web admin by manually configuring its IP address to the same subnet as the router's LAN IP address (e.g. 192.168.50.10). Note: when this option is firstly enabled, the LAN client may not be able to refresh its IP address to the cellular WAN IP address in a timely fashion. The LAN client may have to manually renew its IP address from DHCP server. After this option is enabled, the DHCP lease time will be 2 minutes. I.e. the LAN client could refresh its IP address and access the network at most one minute after the cellular WAN connection goes up Standby State This option allows you to choose whether to remain connected or disconnected when this WAN connection is no longer in the highest priority and has entered the standby state. When Remain connected is chosen, bringing up this WAN connection to active makes it immediately available for use. Idle Disconnect If this is checked, the connection will disconnect when idle after the configured Time value. This option is disabled by default. Reply to ICMP PING If the checkbox is unticked, this option is disabled and the system will not reply to any ICMP ping echo requests to the WAN IP addresses of this WAN connection. Default: ticked (Yes) https://www.peplink.com 132 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 133 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Cellular Settings If Alternate between SIM A and SIM B periodically is selected, the SIM card will be switching according to the schedule time in the SIM Cards Alternate. SIM Card If Custom Selection is selected, you can designate the priority of the SIM cards
(SIM A/ SIM B/ Remote SIM/ SpeedFusion Connect) and connect to. For routers that support the SIM Injector, you may select the Remote SIM to provision a SIM from a SIM Injector. Further details on the SIM Injector found is available here: https://www.peplink.com/products/sim-injector/ . If Use Remote SIM Only is selected in the SIM card section, the Remote SIM Settings will be shown. Remote SIM Settings Fallback to Prefered SIM when SIM Cards Alternate You may need to enable the remote SIM Host settings in the Remote SIM management, see the section 22.10 or Appendix B for more details on FusionSIM. After that, click on Scan nearby remote SIM server to show the serial number(s) of the connected SIM Injector(s). If you want to select a specific SIM, in the Cellular Settings, type : and then the number of the SIM slot, eg.1111-2222-3333:7. This option is allowing to switch to another SIM cards when the Cellular WAN reached fallback timeout. If Alternate between SIM A and SIM B periodically is selected in the SIM Card section, the SIM Cards Alternate will be shown:
You may set the schedule time for for switching between SIM A only and SIM B only. 5G/LTE/3G This drop-down menu allows restricting cellular to particular band. Click the button to enable the selection of specific bands. Optimal Network Discovery Cellular WANs by default will only handover from 3G to LTE network when there is no active data traffic, enable this option will make it run the handover procedures after fallback to 3G for a defined effective period, even this may interrupt the connectivity for a short while. Band Selection When set to Auto , band selection allows for automatically connecting to available, supported bands (frequencies) . https://www.peplink.com 134 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When set to Manual, you can manually select the bands (frequencies) the SIM will connect to. Data Roaming This checkbox enables data roaming on this particular SIM card. When data roaming is enabled this option allows you to select in which countries the SIM has a data connection. The option is configured by using MMC (country) codes.Please check your service providers data roaming policy before proceeding. Authentication Choose from PAP Only or CHAP Only to use those authentication methods exclusively. Select Auto to automatically choose an authentication method. Operator Settings APN / Login /
Password /
SIM PIN Bandwidth Allowance Monitor Action Start Day Monthly Allowance This setting allows you to configure the APN settings of your connection. If Auto is selected, the mobile operator should be detected automatically. The connected device will be configured and connection will be made automatically. If there is any difficulty in making connection, you may select Custom to enter your carriers APN , Login , Password , and Dial Number settings manually. The correct values can be obtained from your carrier. The default and recommended setting is Auto . When Auto is selected, the information in these fields will be filled automatically. Custom to customize these parameters. The parameter values are Select determined by and can be obtained from the ISP. Check the box Enable to enable bandwidth usage monitoring on this WAN connection for each billing cycle. When this option is not enabled, bandwidth usage of each month is still being tracked but no action will be taken. If email notification is enabled, you will be notified by email when usage hits 75% and 95% of the monthly allowance. If Disconnect when usage hits 100% of monthly allowance is checked, this WAN connection will be disconnected automatically when the usage hits the monthly allowance. It will not resume connection unless this option has been turned off or the usage has been reset when a new billing cycle starts. This option allows you to define which day of the month each billing cycle begins. This field is for defining the maximum bandwidth usage allowed for the WAN connection each month. Signal Threshold Settings If signal threshold is defined, this connection will be treated as down when a weaker than threshold signal is determined. The following values are used by the threshold scale:
https://www.peplink.com 135 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To define the threshold manually using question Mark and the following field will be visible. specific signal strength values, please click on the 9.3 Wi-Fi WAN To access/configure the Cellular WAN settings, click Network > Wi-Fi WAN Connection Name . WAN Connection Settings WAN Connection Name Enter a name to represent this Wi-Fi WAN connection. https://www.peplink.com 136 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Enable Click the checkbox to toggle the on and off state of this connection. Connection Priority This option allows you to configure the WAN connection whether for normal daily usage or as a backup connection only. If Always-on is chosen, the WAN connection will be kept on continuously, regardless of the priority of other WAN connections. If Backup is chosen, the WAN connection will depend on other WAN connections. It will not be used when one or more higher priority dependent WAN connections are connected. Independent from Backup WANs If this is checked, the connection will be working independent from other Backup WAN connections. Those in Backup Priority will ignore the status of this WAN connection, and will be used when none of the other higher priority connections are available. Routing Mode This option allows you to select the routing method to be used in routing IP frames via the WAN connection. The mode can be either NAT (Network Address Translation) or IP Forwarding. In the case if you need to choose IP Forwarding for your scenario. Click the button to enable IP Forwarding. Standby State This setting specifies the state of the WAN connection while in standby. The available options are Remain Connected and Disconnect . Reply to ICMP PING If this setting is disabled, the WAN connection will not respond to ICMP ping requests. By default, this setting is enabled. Wi-Fi WAN Settings Channel Width Select the channel width for this Wi-Fi WAN. 20MHz will have greater support for older devices using 2.4Ghz, while 40MHz is appropriate for networks with newer devices that connect using 5Ghz https://www.peplink.com 137 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Determine whether the channel will be automatically selected. If you select custom, the following table will appear:
Channel Output Power If you are setting up a network with many Wi-Fi devices in close proximity, then you can configure the output power here. Click the boost button for additional power. However, with that option ticked, output power may exceed local regulatory limits. Data Rate Selecting Auto will enable the router to automatically determine the best data rate, while manually selecting a rate will force devices to connect using the fixed rate. Roaming Checking this box will enable Wi-Fi roaming. Click the options. icon for additional Connect to Any Open Mode AP This option is to specify whether the Wi-Fi WAN will connect to any open mode access points it finds. Beacon Miss Counter Channel Scan Interval This sets the threshold for the number of missed beacons. Configure Channel Scan Interval in ms. 9.3.1 Creating Wi-Fi Connection Proles You can manually create a profile to connect to a Wi-Fi connection. This is useful for creating a profile for connecting to hidden-SSID access points. Click Network > Wi-Fi WAN > Create Profile to get started. This will open a window similar to the one shown below https://www.peplink.com 138 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Wi-Fi Connection Profile Settings Network Name
(SSID) Enter a name to represent this Wi-Fi connection. This option allows you to select which security policy is used for this wireless network. Available options:
Security Open WEP Enhanced Open (OWE) WPA3 -Personal WPA2/WPA3 -Personal WPA/ WPA2 Personal WPA/ WPA2 ENterprise 802.1X with dynamic WEP key Shared Key Enter the password for the wireless network. Preffered BSSID Connected Method Configure the BSSID. The BSSID is the MAC address of the wireless access point
(WAP). Choose DHCP or Static IP for the Wi-Fi WAN connection method. DNS Servers Configure the DNS servers that this WAN connection should use. https://www.peplink.com 139 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.4 WAN Connection Settings (Common) The remaining WAN-related settings are common to the WAN connection:
Physical Interface Settings This is the port speed of the WAN connection. It should be set to the same speed as the connected device in case of any port negotiation problems. Speed When a static speed is set, you may choose whether to advertise its speed to the peer device or not. Advertise Speed is selected by default. You can choose not to advertise the port speed if the port has difficulty in negotiating with the peer device. Default: Auto MTU This field is for specifying the Maximum Transmission Unit value of the WAN connection. An excessive MTU value can cause file downloads stall shortly after connected. You may consult your ISP for the connection's MTU value. Default value is 1440. This field is for specifying the Maximum Segment Size of the WAN connection. When Auto is selected, MSS will be depended on the MTU value. When Custom is selected, you may enter a value for MSS. This value will be announced to remote TCP servers for maximum data that it can receive during the establishment of TCP connections. MSS Some Internet servers are unable to listen to MTU setting if ICMP is filtered by firewall between the connections. Normally, MSS equals to MTU minus 40. You are recommended to reduce the MSS only if changing of the MTU value cannot effectively inform some remote servers to size down data size. Default: Auto MAC Address Clone Some service providers (e.g. cable network) identify the client's MAC address and require client to always use the same MAC address to connect to the network. If it is the case, you may change the WAN interface's MAC address to the client PC's one by entering the PC's MAC address to this field. If you are not sure, click the Default button to restore to the default value. https://www.peplink.com 140 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink VLAN Check the box to assign a VLAN to the interface. 9.5 WAN Health Check To ensure traffic is routed to healthy WAN connections only, the Pepwave router can periodically check the health of each WAN connection. The health check settings for each WAN connection can be independently configured via Network > WAN Connection Name Health Check Settings Method This setting specifies the health check method for the WAN connection. This value can be configured as Disabled , PING , DNS Lookup , or HTTP . The default method is DNS Lookup . For mobile Internet connections, the value of Method can be configured as Disabled or SmartCheck . Health Check Disabled When Disabled is chosen in the Method field, the WAN connection will always be considered as up. The connection will NOT be treated as down in the event of IP routing errors. Health Check Method: PING ICMP ping packets will be issued to test the connectivity with a configurable target IP address or hostname. A WAN connection is considered as up if ping responses are received from either one or both of the ping hosts. PING Hosts This setting specifies IP addresses or hostnames with which connectivity is to be tested via ICMP ping. If Use first two DNS servers as Ping Hosts is checked, the target ping host will be the first DNS server for the corresponding WAN connection. Reliable ping hosts with a high uptime should be considered. By default, the first two DNS servers of the WAN connection are used as the ping hosts. Health Check Method: DNS Lookup https://www.peplink.com 141 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink DNS lookups will be issued to test connectivity with target DNS servers. The connection will be treated as up if DNS responses are received from one or both of the servers, regardless of whether the result was positive or negative. Health Check DNS Servers This field allows you to specify two DNS hosts IP addresses with which connectivity is to be tested via DNS lookup. If Use first two DNS servers as Health Check DNS Servers is checked, the first two DNS servers will be the DNS lookup targets for checking a connection's health. If the box is not checked, Host 1 must be filled, while a value for Host 2 is optional. If Include public DNS servers is selected and no response is received from all specified DNS servers, DNS lookups will also be issued to some public DNS servers. A WAN connection will be treated as down only if there is also no response received from the public DNS servers. Connections will be considered as up if DNS responses are received from any one of the health check DNS servers, regardless of a positive or negative result. By default, the first two DNS servers of the WAN connection are used as the health check DNS servers. Health Check Method: HTTP HTTP connections will be issued to test connectivity with configurable URLs and strings to match. URL1 WAN Settings>WAN Edit>Health Check Settings>URL1 The URL will be retrieved when performing an HTTP health check. When String to Match is left blank, a health check will pass if the HTTP return code is between 200 and 299 (Note: HTTP redirection codes 301 or 302 are treated as failures). When String to Match is filled, a health check will pass if the HTTP return code is between 200 and 299 and if the HTTP response content contains the string. URL 2 WAN Settings>WAN Edit>Health Check Settings>URL2 If URL2 is also provided, a health check will pass if either one of the tests passed. https://www.peplink.com 142 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Other Health Check Settings Timeout This setting specifies the timeout in seconds for ping/DNS lookup requests. The default timeout is 5 seconds . Health Check Interval This setting specifies the time interval in seconds between ping or DNS lookup requests. The default health check interval is 5 seconds . Health Check Retries This setting specifies the number of consecutive ping/DNS lookup timeouts after which the Pepwave router will treat the corresponding WAN connection as down. Default health retries is set to 3 . Using the default Health Retries setting of 3 , the corresponding WAN connection will be treated as down after three consecutive timeouts. Recovery Retries This setting specifies the number of consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup responses that must be received before the Pepwave router treats a previously down WAN connection as up again. By default, Recover Retries is set to 3 . Using the default setting, a WAN connection that is treated as down will be considered as up again upon receiving three consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup responses. Automatic Public DNS Server Check on DNS Test Failure When the health check method is set to DNS Lookup and health checks fail, the Pepwave router will automatically perform DNS lookups on public DNS servers. If the tests are successful, the WAN may not be down, but rather the target DNS server malfunctioned. You will see the following warning message on the main page:
https://www.peplink.com 143 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.6 Bandwidth Allowance Monitoring Bandwidth Allowance Monitor If Email Notification is enabled, you will be notified by email when usage hits 75% and 95% of the monthly allowance. If Disconnect when usage hits 100% of monthly allowance is checked, this WAN connection will be disconnected automatically when the usage hits the monthly allowance. It will not resume connection unless this option has been turned off or the usage has been reset when a new billing cycle starts. This option allows you to define which day of the month each billing cycle begins. This field is for defining the maximum bandwidth usage allowed for the WAN connection each month. Action Start Day Monthly Allowance Due to different network protocol overheads and conversions, the amount of data reported by this Peplink device is not representative of actual billable data usage as metered by your network provider. Peplink disclaims any obligation or responsibility for any events arising from the use of the numbers shown here. Disclaimer https://www.peplink.com 144 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 9.7 Additional Public IP address Additional Public IP Settings IP Address List IP Address List represents the list of fixed Internet IP addresses assigned by the ISP in the event that more than one Internet IP address is assigned to this WAN connection. Enter the fixed Internet IP addresses and the corresponding subnet mask, and then click the Down Arrow button to populate IP address entries to the IP Address List . 9.8 Dynamic DNS Settings Pepwave routers are capable of registering the domain name relationships to dynamic DNS service providers. Through registration with dynamic DNS service provider(s), the default public Internet IP address of each WAN connection can be associated with a host name. With dynamic DNS service enabled for a WAN connection, you can connect to your WAN's IP address from the external, even if its IP address is dynamic. You must register for an account from the listed dynamic DNS service providers before enabling this option. If the WAN connection's IP address is a reserved private IP address (i.e., behind a NAT router), the public IP of each WAN will be automatically reported to the DNS service provider. Either upon a change in IP addresses or every 23 days without link reconnection, the Pepwave router will connect to the dynamic DNS service provider to perform an IP address update within the providers records. The settings for dynamic DNS service provider(s) and the association of hostname(s) are configured via Network > WAN > Details > Dynamic DNS Service Provider/Dynamic DNS Settings . https://www.peplink.com 145 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Dynamic DNS Settings This setting specifies the dynamic DNS service provider to be used for the WAN based on supported dynamic DNS service providers:
Dynamic DNS Disabled changeip.com dyndns.org no-ip.org DNS-O-Matic Others Support custom Dynamic DNS servers by entering its URL. Works with any service compatible with DynDNS API. Select Disabled to disable this feature. This setting specifies the registered user name for the dynamic DNS service. User ID/ Username
/ Email Password This setting specifies the password for the dynamic DNS service. Hosts This field allows you to specify a list of host names or domains to be associated with the public Internet IP address of the WAN connection. If you need to enter more than one host, use a carriage return to separate them. Important Note In order to use dynamic DNS services, appropriate host name registration(s) and a valid account with a supported dynamic DNS service provider are required. A dynamic DNS update is performed whenever a WANs IP address changes (e.g., the IP is changed after a DHCP IP refresh, reconnection, etc.). Due to dynamic DNS service providers policy, a dynamic DNS host will automatically expire if the host record has not been updated for a long time. Therefore the Pepwave router performs an update every 23 days, even if a WANs IP address has not changed. https://www.peplink.com 146 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10 SpeedFusion VPN Pepwave bandwidth bonding SpeedFusion TM is our patented technology that enables our SD-WAN routers to bond multiple Internet connections to increase site-to-site bandwidth and reliability. SpeedFusion functionality securely connects your Pepwave router to another Pepwave or Peplink device (Peplink Balance 210/310/380/580/710/1350 only). Data, voice, or video communications between these locations are kept confidential across the public Internet. Bandwidth bonding SpeedFusion TM is specifically designed for multi-WAN environments. In case of failures and network congestion at one or more WANs, other WANs can be used to continue carrying the network traffic. Different models of our SD-WAN routers have different numbers of site-to-site connections allowed. End-users who need to have more site-to-site connections can purchase a SpeedFusion license to increase the number of site-to-site connections allowed. Pepwave routers can aggregate all WAN connections bandwidth for routing SpeedFusion TM traffic. Unless all the WAN connections of one site are down, Pepwave routers can keep the VPN up and running. VPN bandwidth bonding is supported in Firmware 5.1 or above. All available bandwidth will be utilized to establish the VPN tunnel, and all traffic will be load balanced at packet level across all links. VPN bandwidth bonding is enabled by default. https://www.peplink.com 147 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.1 SpeedFusion VPN To configure SpeedFusion VPN, navigate to Advanced > SpeedFusion VPN . The local LAN subnet and subnets behind the LAN (defined under Static Route on the LAN settings page) will be advertised to the VPN. All VPN members (branch offices and headquarters) will be able to route to local subnets. Note that all LAN subnets and the subnets behind them must be unique. Otherwise, VPN members will not be able to access each other. All data can be routed over the VPN using the 256-bit AES encryption standard. To configure, navigate to Advanced > SpeedFusion VPN and click the New Profile button to create a new VPN profile (you may have to first save the displayed default profile in order to access the New Profile button). Each profile specifies the settings for making VPN connection with one remote Pepwave or Peplink device. Note that available settings vary by model. A list of defined SpeedFusion connection profiles and a Link Failure Detection Time option will be shown. Click the New Profile button to create a new VPN connection profile for making a VPN connection to a remote Pepwave or Peplink device via the available WAN connections. Each profile is for making a VPN connection with one remote Pepwave or Peplink Device. https://www.peplink.com 148 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SpeedFusion VPN Profile Settings Name This field is for specifying a name to represent this profile. The name can be any combination of alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z), underscores (_), dashes
(-), and/or non-leading/trailing spaces ( ). Enable When this box is checked, this VPN connection profile will be enabled. Otherwise, it will be disabled. Encryption By default, VPN traffic is encrypted with 256-bit AES . If Off is selected on both sides of a VPN connection, no encryption will be applied. Authentication Select from By Remote ID Only , Preshared Key , or X.509 to specify the method the Pepwave MAX will use to authenticate peers. When selecting By Remote ID Only , be sure to enter a unique peer ID number in the Remote ID field. Remote ID /
Pre-shared Key This optional field becomes available when Remote ID / Pre-shared Key is selected as the Pepwave routers VPN Authentication method, as explained above. Pre-shared Key defines the pre-shared key used for this particular VPN connection. The VPN connection's session key will be further protected by the pre-shared key. The connection will be up only if the pre-shared keys on each side match. When the peer is running firmware 5.0+, this setting will be ignored. https://www.peplink.com 149 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Enter Remote IDs either by typing out each Remote ID and Pre-shared Key, or by pasting a CSV. If you wish to paste a CSV, click the ID / Preshared Key setting. icon next to the Remote Remote ID/Remote Certificate These optional fields become available when X.509 is selected as the Pepwave MAXs VPN authentication method, as explained above. To authenticate VPN connections using X.509 certificates, copy and paste certificate details into these fields. To get more information on a listed X.509 certificate, click the Show Details link below the field. Allow Shared Remote ID When this option is enabled, the router will allow multiple peers to run using the same remote ID. NAT Mode Check this box to allow the local DHCP server to assign an IP address to the remote peer. When NAT Mode is enabled, all remote traffic over the VPN will be tagged with the assigned IP address using network address translation. Remote IP Address / Host Names
(Optional) If NAT Mode is not enabled, you can enter a remote peers WAN IP address or hostname(s) here. If the remote uses more than one address, enter only one of them here. Multiple hostnames are allowed and can be separated by a space character or carriage return. Dynamic-DNS host names are also accepted. This field is optional. With this field filled, the Pepwave MAX will initiate connection to each of the remote IP addresses until it succeeds in making a connection. If the field is empty, the Pepwave MAX will wait for connection from the remote peer. Therefore, at least one of the two VPN peers must specify this value. Otherwise, VPN connections cannot be established. Cost Define path cost for this profile. OSPF will determine the best route through the network using the assigned cost. Default: 10 This field is used to specify a UDP port number for transporting outgoing VPN data. If Default is selected, UDP port 4500 will be used. Port 32015 will be used if the remote unit uses Firmware prior to version 5.4 or if port 4500 is unavailable. If Custom is selected, enter an outgoing port number from 1 to 65535. Data Port the protocol Click
[EXPERIMENTAL].In the case TCP protocol is used, the exposed TCP session option can be authorised to work with TCP accelerated WAN link. configure stream using TCP data icon to Bandwidth Limit Define maximum download and upload speed to each individual peer. This functionality requires the peer to use SpeedFusion VPN version 4.0.0 or above. WAN Smoothing While using SpeedFusion VPN, utilize multiple WAN links to reduce the impact of packet loss and get the lowest possible latency at the expense of extra bandwidth consumption. This is suitable for streaming applications where the average bitrate requirement is much lower than the WAN's available bandwidth. https://www.peplink.com 150 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Off - Disable WAN Smoothing. Normal - The total bandwidth consumption will be at most 2x of the original data traffic. Medium - The total bandwidth consumption will be at most 3x of the original data traffic. High - The total bandwidth consumption depends on the number of connected active tunnels. Forward Error Correction (FEC) can help to recover packet loss by using extra bandwidth to send redundant data packets. Higher FEC level will recover packets on a higher loss rate link. The expected overhead of Low is 13.3% and High is 26.7%. Require peer using SpeedFusion VPN version 8.0.0 and above. Forward Error Correction Receive Buffer Receive Buffer can help to reduce out-of-order packets and jitter, but will introduce extra latency to the tunnel. Default is 0 ms, which disables the buffer, and maximum buffer size is 2000 ms. If the packet size is larger than the tunnel's MTU, it will be fragmented inside the tunnel in order to pass through. Packet Fragmentation Select Always to fragment any packets that are too large to send, or Use DF Flag to only fragment packets with Don't Fragment bit cleared. This can be useful if your application does Path MTU Discovery, usually sending large packets with DF bit set, if allowing them to go through by fragmentation, the MTU will not be detected correctly. Use IP ToS A Checking this button enables the use of IP ToS header field. Latency Difference Cutoff A Traffic will be stopped for links that exceed the specified millisecond value with respect to the lowest latency link. (e.g. Lowest latency is 100ms, a value of 500ms means links with latency 600ms or more will not be used) A - Advanced feature, please click the To enable Layer 2 Bridging between SpeedFusion VPN profiles, navigate to Network > LAN >
Basic Settings > *LAN Profile Name* and refer to instructions in section 9.1 button on the top right-hand corner to activate. https://www.peplink.com 151 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Traffic Distribution Policy Congestion Latency Level This option allows you to select the desired out-bound traffic distribution policy:
Bonding - Aggregate multiple WAN-to-WAN links into a single higher throughput tunnel. Dynamic Weighted Bonding - Aggregates WAN-to-WAN links with similar latencies. By default, Bonding is selected as a traffic distribution policy. For most WANs, especially on cellular networks, the latency will increase when the link becomes more congested. Setting the Congestion Latency Level to Low will treat the link as congested more aggressively. Setting it to High will allow the latency to increase more before treating it as congested. Ignore Packet Loss Event By default, when there is packet loss, it is considered as a congestion event. If this is not the case, select this option to ignore the packet loss event. Disable Bufferbloat Handling Bufferbloat is a phenomenon on the WAN side when it is congested. The latency can become very high due to buffering on the uplink. By default, the Dynamic Weighted Bonding policy will try its best to mitigate bufferbloat by reducing TCP throughput when the WAN is congested. However, as a side effect, the tunnel might not achieve maximum bandwidth. Selecting this option will disable the bufferbloat handling mentioned above. Disable TCP ACK Optimization By default, TCP ACK will be forwarded to remote peers as fast as possible. This will consume more bandwidth, but may help to improve TCP performance as well. Selecting this option will disable the TCP ACK optimization mentioned above. Packet Jitter Buffer The default jitter buffer is 150ms, and can be modified from 0ms to 500ms. The jitter buffer may increase the tunnel latency. If you want to keep the latency as low as possible, you can set it to 0ms to disable the buffer. Note : If the Receive Buffer is set, the Packet Jitter Buffer will be automatically disabled. https://www.peplink.com 152 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 8.41 WAN Connection Priority WAN Connection Priority If your device supports it, you can specify the priority of WAN connections to be used for making VPN connections. WAN connections set to OFF will never be used. Only available WAN connections with the highest priority will be used. To enable asymmetric connections, connection mapping to remote WANs, cut-off latency, and packet loss suspension time, click the button. Send All Traffic To This feature allows you to redirect all traffic to a specified SpeedFusion VPN connection. Click the button to select your connection and the following menu will appear:
You could also specify a DNS server to resolve incoming DNS requests. Click the checkbox next to Backup Site to designate a backup SpeedFusion profile that will take over, should the main SpeedFusion VPN connection fail. https://www.peplink.com 153 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Outbound Policy/SpeedFusion VPN Outbound Custom Rules Some outbound rules Advanced>SpeedFusion VPN . See Section 14 for more information on outbound policy settings. outbound custom models policy allow and you set to from SpeedFusion VPN Local ID The local ID is a text string to identify this local unit when establishing a VPN connection. When creating a profile on a remote unit, this local ID must be entered in the remote unit's Remote ID field. Click the icon to edit Local ID . SpeedFusion VPN Settings Handshake Port A To designate a custom handshake port (TCP), click the custom radio button and enter the port number you wish to designate. Link Failure Detection Time The bonded VPN can detect routing failures on the path between two sites over each WAN connection. Failed WAN connections will not be used to route VPN traffic. Health check packets are sent to the remote unit to detect any failure. The more frequently checks are sent, the shorter the detection time, although more bandwidth will be consumed. When Recommended (default) is selected, a health check packet is sent every five seconds, and the expected detection time is 15 seconds. When Fast is selected, a health check packet is sent every three seconds, and the expected detection time is six seconds. When Faster is selected, a health check packet is sent every second, and the https://www.peplink.com 154 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink expected detection time is two seconds. When Extreme is selected, a health check packet is sent every 0.1 second, and the expected detection time is less than one second. A - Advanced feature, please click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Important Note Peplink proprietary SpeedFusion TM uses TCP port 32015 and UDP port 4500 for establishing VPN connections. If you have a firewall in front of your Pepwave devices, you will need to add firewall rules for these ports and protocols to allow inbound and outbound traffic to pass through the firewall. Want to know more about VPN sub-second session failover? Visit our YouTube Channel for a video tutorial!
Tip http://youtu.be/TLQgdpPSY88 https://www.peplink.com 155 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.2 The Pepwave Router Behind a NAT Router Pepwave routers support establishing SpeedFusion TM over WAN connections which are behind a NAT (network address translation) router. To enable a WAN connection behind a NAT router to accept VPN connections, you can configure the NAT router in front of the WAN connection to inbound port-forward TCP port 32015 to the Pepwave router. If one or more WAN connections on Unit A can accept VPN connections (by means of port forwarding or not), while none of the WAN connections on the peer Unit B can do so, you should enter all of Unit As public IP addresses or hostnames into Unit Bs Remote IP Addresses /
Host Names field. Leave the field in Unit A blank. With this setting, a SpeedFusion TM connection can be set up and all WAN connections on both sides will be utilized. See the following diagram for an example of this setup in use:
One of the WANs connected to Router A is non-NATd ( 212.1.1.1 ). The rest of the WANs connected to Router A and all WANs connected to Router B are NATd. In this case, the Peer IP Addresses / Host Names field for Router B should be filled with all of Router As hostnames or public IP addresses (i.e., 212.1.1.1 , 212.2.2.2 , and 212.3.3.3 ), and the field in Router A can be left blank. The two NAT routers on WAN1 and WAN3 connected to Router A should inbound port-forward TCP port 32015 to Router A so that all WANs will be utilized in establishing the VPN. https://www.peplink.com 156 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 10.3 SpeedFusion VPN Status SpeedFusion VPN status is shown in the Dashboard. The connection status of each connection profile is shown as below. After clicking the Status button at the top right corner of the SpeedFusion TM table, you will be forwarded to Status > SpeedFusion VPN , where you can view subnet and WAN connection information for each VPN peer. IP Subnets Must Be Unique Among VPN Peers The entire interconnected SpeedFusion TM network is a single non-NAT IP network. Avoid duplicating subnets in your sites to prevent connectivity problems when accessing those subnets. https://www.peplink.com 157 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 11 IPsec VPN IPsec VPN functionality securely connects one or more branch offices to your company's main headquarters or to other branches. Data, voice, and video communications between these locations are kept safe and confidential across the public Internet. IPsec VPN on Pepwave routers is specially designed for multi-WAN environments. For instance, if a user sets up multiple IPsec profiles for a multi-WAN environment and WAN1 is connected and healthy, IPsec traffic will go through this link. However, should unforeseen problems (e.g., unplugged cables or ISP problems) cause WAN1 to go down, our IPsec implementation will make use of WAN2 and WAN3 for failover. 11.1 IPsec VPN Settings Many Pepwave products can make multiple IPsec VPN connections with Peplink, Pepwave, Cisco, and Juniper routers. Note that all LAN subnets and the subnets behind them must be unique. Otherwise, VPN members will not be able to access each other. All data can be routed over the VPN with a selection of encryption standards, such as 3DES, AES-128, and AES-256. To configure IPsec VPN on Pepwave devices that support it, navigate to Advanced>IPsec VPN. Click the New Profile button to create new IPsec VPN profiles that make VPN connections to remote Pepwave, Cisco, or Juniper routers via available WAN connections. To edit any of the profiles, click on its associated connection name in the leftmost column. https://www.peplink.com 158 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink IPsec VPN Profile Settings Name Active This field is for specifying a local name to represent this connection profile. When this box is checked, this IPsec VPN connection profile will be enabled. Otherwise, it will be disabled. Two versions of the IKE standards are available:
IKE Version IKEv1 IKEv2 https://www.peplink.com 159 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Connect Upon Disconnection of Remote Gateway IP Address / Host Name IPsec Type Local Networks Check this box and select a WAN to connect to this VPN automatically when the specified WAN is disconnected. Enter the remote peers public IP address. For Aggressive Mode , this is optional. Policy-based - (default) All the matched traffic as defined in Local Networks and Remote Networks will be routed to this IPsec connection, this cannot be overridden by other routing methods. Route-based - Outbound Policy rule is required to route traffic to this tunnel and comes with more flexibility to control how to route traffic compared to Policy-based. If you want to modify the traffic selector instead of using the default (0.0.0.0/0). Note : This option is available for certain following models only:
MAX: BR1 ENT, Transit, 700 HW3 or above, HD2 HW5 or above, HD4 Enter the local LAN subnets here. If you have defined static routes, they will be shown here. Using NAT, you can map a specific local network / IP address to another, and the packets received by remote gateway will appear to be coming from the mapped network / IP address. This allow you to establish IPsec connection to a remote site that has one or more subnets overlapped with local site. Two types of NAT policies can be defined:
One-to-One NAT policy: if the defined subnet in Local Network and NAT Network has the same size, for example, policy "192.168.50.0/24 > 172.16.1.0/24" will translate the local IP address 192.168.50.10 to 172.16.1.10 and 192.168.50.20 to 172.16.1.20. This is a bidirectional mapping which means clients in remote site can initiate connection to the local clients using the mapped address too. Many-to-One NAT policy: if the defined NAT Network on the right hand side is an IP address (or having a network prefix /32), for example, policy "192.168.1.0/24
> 172.168.50.1/32" will translate all clients in 192.168.1.0/24 network to 172.168.50.1. This is a unidirectional mapping which means clients in remote site will not be able to initiate connection to the local clients. Remote Networks Enter the LAN and subnets that are located at the remote site here. Authentication To access your VPN, clients will need to authenticate by your choice of methods. Choose between the Preshared Key and X.509 Certificate methods of https://www.peplink.com 160 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
1 2 3 4 | User Manual-2 | Users Manual | 3.90 MiB | May 26 2023 |
authentication. Mode Choose Main Mode if both IPsec peers use static IP addresses. Choose Aggressive Mode if one of the IPsec peers uses dynamic IP addresses. Force UDP Encapsulation Pre-shared Key Remote Certificate (pem encoded) For forced UDP encapsulation regardless of NAT-traversal, tick this checkbox. This defines the peer authentication pre-shared key used to authenticate this VPN connection. The connection will be up only if the pre-shared keys on each side match. Available only when X.509 Certificat e is chosen as the Authentication method, this field allows you to paste a valid X.509 certificate. Local ID In Main Mode , this field can be left blank. In Aggressive Mode , if Remote Gateway IP Address is filled on this end and the peer end, this field can be left blank. Otherwise, this field is typically a U-FQDN. Remote ID In Main Mode , this field can be left blank. In Aggressive Mode , if Remote Gateway IP Address is filled on this end and the peer end, this field can be left blank. Otherwise, this field is typically a U-FQDN. Phase 1 (IKE) Proposal In Main Mode , this allows setting up to six encryption standards, in descending order of priority, to be used in initial connection key negotiations. In Aggressive Mode , only one selection is permitted. Phase 1 DH Group This is the Diffie-Hellman group used within IKE. This allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an insecure communications channel. The larger the group number, the higher the security. Group 2 : 1024-bit is the default value. Group 5 : 1536-bit is the alternative option. Phase 1 SA Lifetime This setting specifies the lifetime limit of this Phase 1 Security Association. By default, it is set at 3600 seconds. Phase 2 (ESP) Proposal In Main Mode , this allows setting up to six encryption standards, in descending order of priority, to be used for the IP data that is being transferred. In Aggressive Mode , only one selection is permitted. Phase 2 PFS Group Perfect forward secrecy (PFS) ensures that if a key was compromised, the attacker will be able to access only the data protected by that key. None - Do not request for PFS when initiating connection. However, since there is no valid reason to refuse PFS, the system will allow the connection to use PFS if requested by the remote peer. This is the default value. Group 2 : 1024-bit Diffie-Hellman group. The larger the group number, the higher the security. Group 5 : 1536-bit is the third option. https://www.peplink.com 161 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Phase 2 SA Lifetime This setting specifies the lifetime limit of this Phase 2 Security Association. By default, it is set at 28800 seconds. WAN Connection Priority WAN Connection Select the appropriate WAN connection from the drop-down menu. 11.2 GRE Tunnel Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) is a tunneling protocol that can encapsulate a wide variety of network layer protocols inside virtual point-to-point links over an Internet Protocol network. A GRE tunnel is similar to IPSec or SpeedFusion VPN. To configure a GRE Tunnel, navigate to Advanced > GRE Tunnel . Click the New Profile button to create new GRE tunnel profiles that establish tunnel connections to remote tunnel endpoints via available WAN connections. To edit the profiles, click on its associated connection name in the leftmost column. https://www.peplink.com 162 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Name Active Remote GRE IP Address Tunnel Local IP Address Tunnel Remote IP Address Tunnel Subnet Mask GRE Tunnel Profile Settings This field is for specifying a name to represent this GRE Tunnel connection profile. When this box is checked, this GRE Tunnel connection profile will be enabled. Otherwise, it will be disabled. This field is for entering the remote GREs IP address This field is for specifying the tunnel source IP address. This field is for specifying the tunnel destination IP address This field is to select the subnet mask that is to be used for the GRE tunnel. Connection Select the appropriate WAN connection from the drop-down menu. Remote Networks Input the LAN and subnets that are located at the remote site here. https://www.peplink.com 163 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 12 OpenVPN OpenVPN is a site to site VPN mode that can encapsulate a wide variety of network layer protocols inside virtual point-to-point links over an Internet Protocol network. To configure a OpenVPN, navigate to Advanced > OpenVPN and click the New Profile . Name Active OpenVPN Profile Login Credential
(Optional) Connection OpenVPN Profile Settings This field is for specifying a name to represent this OpenVPN profile. When this box is checked, this OpenVPN connection profile will be enabled. Otherwise, it will be disabled. Upload the OpenVPN configuration (.ovpn) file from your service provider. This option is an optional for you to enter the username and password to login for the OpenVPN connection if the profile need to login. Select the appropriate WAN connection from the drop-down menu. https://www.peplink.com 164 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13 Outbound Policy Pepwave routers can flexibly manage and load balance outbound traffic among WAN connections. Outbound policy is applied only when more than one WAN connection is active . Important Note The settings for managing and load balancing outbound traffic are located at Advanced > Outbound Policy . 13.1 Adding Rules for Outbound Policy The menu underneath enables you to define Outbound policy rules:
The bottom-most rule is Default . Edit this rule to change the devices default manner of controlling outbound traffic for all connections that do not match any of the rules above it. Under the Service heading, click Default to change these settings. To rearrange the priority of outbound rules, drag and drop them into the desired sequence. https://www.peplink.com 165 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink By default, Auto is selected as the Default Rule . You can select Custom to change the algorithm to be used. Please refer to the upcoming sections for the details on the available algorithms. To create a custom rule, click Add Rule at the bottom of the table. https://www.peplink.com 166 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Service Name This setting specifies the name of the outbound traffic rule. New Custom Rule Settings This setting specifies whether the outbound traffic rule takes effect. When Enable is checked, the rule takes effect: traffic is matched and actions are taken by the Pepwave router based on the other parameters of the rule. When Enable is unchecked, the rule does not take effect: the Pepwave router disregards the other parameters of the rule. Click the drop-down menu next to the checkbox to apply a time schedule to this custom rule. This setting specifies the source IP Address, IP Network, MAC Address or Grouped Network for traffic that matches the rule. Enable Source Destination This setting specifies the destination IP address, IP network, Domain name, SpeedFusion Cloud, SpeedFusion VPN Profile or Grouped network for traffic that matches the rule. https://www.peplink.com 167 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink If Domain Name is chosen and a domain name, such as foobar.com , is entered, any outgoing accesses to foobar.com and *.foobar.com will match this criterion. You may enter a wildcard (.*) at the end of a domain name to match any host with a name having the domain name in the middle. If you enter foobar.*, for example, www.foobar.com , www.foobar.co.jp , or foobar.co.uk will also match. Placing wildcards in any other position is not supported. Note: if a server has one Internet IP address and multiple server names, and if one of the names is defined here, access to any one of the server names will also match this rule. This setting specifies the IP protocol and port of traffic that matches this rule. Via a drop-down menu, the following protocols can be specified:
Protocol and Port Any TCP UDP IP DSCP Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can be used to automatically fill in the protocol and port number of common Internet services (e.g., HTTP, HTTPS, etc.) After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu, the protocol and port number remains manually modifiable. This setting specifies the behavior of the Pepwave router for the custom rule. One of the following values can be selected (Note that some Pepwave routers provide only some of these options):
Algorithm Weighted Balance Persistence Enforced Priority Overflow Least Used Lowest Latency Fastest Response Time For a full explanation of each Algorithm, please see the following article:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/exactly-how-do-peplinks-load-balancing-algorithmns-work/8059 Load Distribution Weight This is to define the outbound traffic weight ratio for each WAN connection. https://www.peplink.com 168 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When No connections are available This field allows you to configure the default action when all the selected Connections are not available. Drop the Traffic - Traffic will be discarded. Use Any Available Connections - Traffic will be routed to any available Connection, even it is not selected in the list. Fall-through to Next Rule - Traffic will continue to match the next Outbound Policy rule just like this rule is inactive. Terminate Sessions on Connection Recovery This setting specifies whether to terminate existing IP sessions on a less preferred WAN connection in the event that a more preferred WAN connection is recovered. This setting is applicable to the Priority algorithms. By default, this setting is disabled. In this case, existing IP sessions will not be terminated or affected when any other WAN connection is recovered. When this setting is enabled, existing IP sessions may be terminated when another WAN connection is recovered, such that only the preferred healthy WAN connection(s) is used at any point in time. 13.1.1 Algorithm: Weighted Balance This setting specifies the ratio of WAN connection usage to be applied on the specified IP protocol and port. This setting is applicable only when Algorithm is set to Weighted Balance . The amount of matching traffic that is distributed to a WAN connection is proportional to the weight of the WAN connection relative to the total weight. Use the sliders to change each WANs weight. For example, with the following weight settings:
Ethernet WAN1: 10 Ethernet WAN2: 10 Wi-Fi WAN: 10 Cellular 1: 10 Cellular 2: 10 https://www.peplink.com 169 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink USB:
10 Total weight is 60 = (10 +10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10). Matching traffic distributed to Ethernet WAN1 is 16.7% = (10 / 60 x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Ethernet WAN2 is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Wi-Fi WAN is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Cellular 1 is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to Cellular 2 is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. Matching traffic distributed to USB is 16.7% = (10 / 60) x 100%. 13.1.2 Algorithm: Persistence The configuration of persistent services is the solution to the few situations where link load distribution for Internet services is undesirable. For example, for security reasons, many e-banking and other secure websites terminate the session when the client computers Internet IP address changes mid-session. In general, different Internet IP addresses represent different computers. The security concern is that an IP address change during a session may be the result of an unauthorized intrusion attempt. Therefore, to prevent damages from the potential intrusion, the session is terminated upon the detection of an IP address change. Pepwave routers can be configured to distribute data traffic across multiple WAN connections. Also, the Internet IP depends on the WAN connections over which communication actually takes place. As a result, a LAN client computer behind the Pepwave router may communicate using multiple Internet IP addresses. For example, a LAN client computer behind a Pepwave router with three WAN connections may communicate on the Internet using three different IP addresses. With the persistence feature, rules can be configured to enable client computers to persistently utilize the same WAN connections for e-banking and other secure websites. As a result, a client computer will communicate using one IP address, eliminating the issues mentioned above. https://www.peplink.com 170 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink There are two persistent modes: By Source and By Destination . By Source:
By Destination:
The same WAN connection will be used for traffic matching the rule and originating from the same machine, regardless of its destination. This option will provide the highest level of application compatibility. The same WAN connection will be used for traffic matching the rule, originating from the same machine, and going to the same destination. This option can better distribute loads to WAN connections when there are only a few client machines. The default mode is By Source . When there are multiple client requests, they can be distributed
(persistently) to WAN connections with a weight. If you choose Auto in Load Distribution , the weights will be automatically adjusted according to each WANs Downstream Bandwidth which is specified in the WAN settings page). If you choose Custom , you can customize the weight of each WAN manually by using the sliders. 13.1.3 Algorithm: Enforced This setting specifies the WAN connection usage to be applied on the specified IP protocol and port. This setting is applicable only when Algorithm is set to Enforced . Matching traffic will be routed through the specified WAN connection, regardless of the health check status of the WAN connection. Starting from Firmware 5.2, outbound traffic can be enforced to go through a specified SpeedFusion TM connection. 13.1.4 Algorithm: Priority This setting specifies the priority of the WAN connections used to route the specified network service. The highest priority WAN connection available will always be used for routing the specified type of traffic. A lower priority WAN connection will be used only when all higher priority connections have become unavailable. https://www.peplink.com 171 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Starting from Firmware 5.2, outbound traffic can be prioritized to go through SpeedFusion TM connection(s). By default, VPN connections are not included in the priority list. Configure multiple distribution rules to accommodate different kinds of services. Tip 13.1.5 Algorithm: Overflow The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that has the highest priority and is not in full load. When this connection gets saturated, new sessions will be routed to the next healthy WAN connection that is not in full load. Drag and drop to specify the order of WAN connections to be used for routing traffic. Only the highest priority healthy connection that is not in full load will be used. https://www.peplink.com 172 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.6 Algorithm: Least Used The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that is selected in Connection and has the most available download bandwidth. The available download bandwidth of a WAN connection is calculated from the total download bandwidth specified on the WAN settings page and the current download usage. The available bandwidth and WAN selection is determined every time an IP session is made. 13.1.7 Algorithm: Lowest Latency The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that is selected in Connection and has the lowest latency. Latency checking packets are issued periodically to a nearby router of each WAN connection to determine its latency value. The latency of a WAN is the packet round trip time of the WAN connection. Additional network usage may be incurred as a result. Tip The roundtrip time of a 6M down/640k uplink can be higher than that of a 2M down/2M up link because the overall round trip time is lengthened by its slower upload bandwidth, despite its higher downlink speed. Therefore, this algorithm is good for two scenarios:
All WAN connections are symmetric; or A latency sensitive application must be routed through the lowest latency WAN, regardless of the WANs available bandwidth. https://www.peplink.com 173 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 13.1.8 Expert Mode Expert Mode is available on some Pepwave routers for use by advanced users. To enable the feature, click on the help icon and click turn on Expert Mode . In Expert Mode, a new special rule, SpeedFusion TM Routes , is displayed in the Custom Rules table. This rule represents all SpeedFusion TM routes learned from remote VPN peers. By default, this bar is on the top of all custom rules. This position means that traffic for remote VPN subnets will be routed to the corresponding VPN peer. You can create custom Priority or Enforced rules and move them above the bar to override the SpeedFusion TM routes. Upon disabling Expert Mode, all rules above the bar will be removed. https://www.peplink.com 174 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 14 Port Forwarding Pepwave routers can act as a firewall that blocks, by default, all inbound access from the Internet. By using port forwarding, Internet users can access servers behind the Pepwave router. Inbound port forwarding rules can be defined at Advanced > Port Forwarding . To define a new service, click Add Service . Port Forwarding Settings Enable This setting specifies whether the inbound service takes effect. When Enable is checked, the inbound service takes effect: traffic is matched and actions are taken by the Pepwave router based on the other parameters of the rule. When this setting is disabled, the inbound service does not take effect: the Pepwave router disregards the other parameters of the rule. Service Name This setting identifies the service to the system administrator. Valid values for this setting consist of only alphanumeric and underscore _ characters. https://www.peplink.com 175 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Protocol The IP Protocol setting, along with the Port setting, specifies the protocol of the service as TCP, UDP, ICMP, or IP. Traffic that is received by the Pepwave router via the specified protocol at the specified port(s) is forwarded to the LAN hosts specified by the Servers setting. Please see below for details on the Port and Servers settings. Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can be used to automatically fill in the protocol and a single port number of common Internet services
(e.g. HTTP, HTTPS, etc.). After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu, the protocol and port number remain manually modifiable. The Port setting specifies the port(s) that correspond to the service, and can be configured to behave in one of the following manners:
Any Port , Single Port , Port Range , Port Map , and Range Mapping Any Port : all traffic that is received by the Pepwave router via the specified protocol is forwarded to the servers specified by the Servers setting. For example, with IP Protocol set to TCP , and Port set to Any Port , all TCP traffic is forwarded to the configured servers. Single Port : traffic that is received by the Pepwave router via the specified protocol at the specified port is forwarded via the same port to the servers specified by the Servers setting. For example, with IP Protocol set to TCP , and Port set to Single Port and Service Port 80, TCP traffic received on port 80 is forwarded to the configured servers via port 80. Port Port Range : traffic that is received by the Pepwave router via the specified protocol at the specified port range is forwarded via the same respective ports to the LAN hosts specified by the Servers setting. For example, with IP Protocol set to TCP , and Port set to Port Range and Service Ports 80-88, TCP traffic received on ports 80 through 88 is forwarded to the configured servers via the respective ports. Port Mapping : traffic that is received by Pepwave router via the specified protocol at the specified port is forwarded via a different port to the servers specified by the Servers setting. For example, with IP Protocol set to TCP , and Port set to Port Mapping , Service Port 80, and Map to Port 88, TCP traffic on port 80 is forwarded to the configured servers via port 88.
(Please see below for details on the Servers setting.) https://www.peplink.com 176 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Range Mapping : traffic that is received by the Pepwave router via the specified protocol at the specified port range is forwarded via a different port to the servers specified by the Servers setting. Inbound IP Address(es) This setting specifies the WAN connections and Internet IP address(es) from which the service can be accessed. Server IP Address This setting specifies the LAN IP address of the server that handles the requests for the service. 14.1 UPnP / NAT-PMP Settings UPnP and NAT-PMP are network protocols which allow a computer connected to the LAN port to automatically configure the router to allow parties on the WAN port to connect to itself. That way, the process of inbound port forwarding becomes automated. When a computer creates a rule using these protocols, the specified TCP/UDP port of all WAN connections' default IP address will be forwarded. Check the corresponding box(es) to enable UPnP and/or NAT-PMP. Enable these features only if you trust the computers connected to the LAN ports. When the options are enabled, a table listing all the forwarded ports under these two protocols can be found at Status > UPnP / NAT-PMP . https://www.peplink.com 177 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 15 NAT Mappings NAT mappings allow IP address mapping of all inbound and outbound NATd traffic to and from an internal client IP address. Settings to configure NAT mappings are located at Advanced >
NAT Mappings . To add a rule for NAT mappings, click Add NAT Rule . NAT Mapping Settings LAN Client NAT mapping rules can be defined for a single LAN IP Address , an IP Range , or an IP Network . IP Address This refers to the LAN hosts private IP address. The system maps this address to a number of public IP addresses (specified below) in order to facilitate inbound and outbound traffic. This option is only available when IP Address is selected. IP Range The IP range is a contiguous group of private IP addresses used by the LAN host. The system maps these addresses to a number of public IP addresses (specified below) to facilitate outbound traffic. This option is only available when IP Range is selected. https://www.peplink.com 178 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink IP Network The IP network refers to all private IP addresses and ranges managed by the LAN host. The system maps these addresses to a number of public IP addresses
(specified below) to facilitate outbound traffic. This option is only available when IP Network is selected. Inbound Mappings Outbound Mappings This setting specifies the WAN connections and corresponding WAN-specific Internet IP addresses on which the system should bind. Any access to the specified WAN connection(s) and IP address(es) will be forwarded to the LAN host. This option is only available when IP Address is selected in the LAN Client(s) field. Note that: inbound mapping is not needed for WAN connections in drop-in mode or IP forwarding mode. Also note that each WAN IP address can be associated to one NAT mapping only. This setting specifies the WAN IP addresses that should be used when an IP connection is made from a LAN host to the Internet. Each LAN host in an IP range or IP network will be evenly mapped to one of each selected WAN's IP addresses
(for better IP address utilization) in a persistent manner (for better application compatibility). Note that: if you do not want to use a specific WAN for outgoing accesses, you should still choose default here, then customize the outbound access rule in the Outbound Policy section. Also note that WAN connections in drop-in mode or IP forwarding mode are not shown here. Click Save to save the settings when configuration has been completed. Inbound firewall rules override the Inbound Mappings settings. Important Note https://www.peplink.com 179 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 16 Media Fast MediaFast settings can be configured from the Advanced menu. 16.1 Setting Up MediaFast Content Caching To access MediaFast content caching settings, select Advanced > Cache Control MediaFast Enable Click the checkbox to enable MediaFast content caching. Domains / IP Addresses Choose to Cache on all domains , or enter domain names and then choose either Whitelist (cache the specified domains only) or Blacklist (do not cache the specified domains). Source IP Subnet This setting allows caching to be enabled on custom subnets only. If "Any" is selected, then caching will apply to all subnets. https://www.peplink.com 180 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The Secure Content Caching menu operates identically to the MediaFast menu, except it is for secure content cachting accessible through https://. In order for Mediafast devices to cache and deliver HTTPS content, every client needs to have the necessary certificates installed*.
*See https://forum.peplink.com/t/certificate-installation-for-mediafast-https-caching/
Cache Control Content Type Check these boxes to cache the listed content types or leave boxes unchecked to disable caching for the listed types. Cache Lifetime Settings Enter a file extension, such as JPG or DOC. Then enter a lifetime in days to specify how long files with that extension will be cached. Add or delete entries using the controls on the right. https://www.peplink.com 181 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 16.2 Viewing MediaFast Statistics To get details on storage and bandwidth usage, select Status > MediaFast . https://www.peplink.com 182 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 16.3 Prefetch Schedule Content prefetching allows you to download content on a schedule that you define, which can help to preserve network bandwidth during busy times and keep costs down. To access MediaFast content prefetching settings, select Advanced > Prefetch Schedule . Name Status Next Run Time/Last Run Time Last Duration Prefetch Schedule Settings This field displays the name given to the scheduled download. Check the status of your scheduled download here. These fields display the date and time of the next and most recent occurrences of the scheduled download. Check this field to ensure that the most recent download took as long as expected to complete. A value that is too low might indicate an incomplete download or incorrectly specified download target, while a value that is too long could mean a download with an incorrectly specified target or stop time. Result This field indicates whether downloads are in progress (
) or complete (
). Last Download Check this field to ensure that the most recent download file size is within the expected range. A value that is too low might indicate an incomplete download or incorrectly specified download target, while a value that is too long could mean a download with an incorrectly specified target or stop time. This field is also useful for quickly seeing which downloads are consuming the most storage space. To begin a scheduled download immediately, click
. Actions To cancel a scheduled download, click
. To edit a scheduled download, click
. To delete a scheduled download, click
. https://www.peplink.com 183 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click to begin creating a new scheduled download. Clicking the button will cause the following screen to appear:
New Schedule Simply provide the requested information to create your schedule. Clear Web Cache To clear all cached content, click this button. Note that this action cannot be undone. Clear Statistics To clear all prefetch and status page statistics, click this button. https://www.peplink.com 184 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 17 Edge Computing ContentHub allows you to deliver webpages and applications to users connected to the SSID using the local storage on your router, like the Max HD2/HD4 with Mediafast, which can store up to 8GB of media. Users will be able to access news, articles, videos, and access your web app without the need for internet access. The ContentHub can be used to provide infotainment to connected users on transport. 17.1 Conguring the ContentHub ContentHub storage needs to be configured before content can be uploaded to the ContentHub. Click on the link on the information panel to configure storage. To access ContentHub, navigate to Advanced > ContentHub and check the Enable box. On an external server, configure content (a website or application) that will be synced to the ContentHub. For example, an html5 website. To configure a website or application as content, follow the steps below. 17.2 Congure a website for ContentHub This option allows you to sync a website to the Pepwave router. This website will then be published with the specified domain from the router itself and makes the content available to the client via the HTTP/HTTPS protocol. Only FTP sync is supported for this type of ContentHub content. The content should be uploaded to an FTP server before you sync it with ContentHub . https://www.peplink.com 185 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click New Website and a window with the following configuration options will appear:
Schedule Active Type Checking the box toggles the activation of the content. Select the type of content: Website or Application. Protocol Configure the protocol to be used: HTTP, HTTPS or both. Domain/Path Enter the URL for the ContenHub to use as the domain name for client access
(such as http://mytest.com). Method Only applicable for Application type content. Choose between sync or file upload. Source Period Bandwidth Limit Enter the details of the server that the content will be downloaded from. Enter credentials under Username and Password . This field determines how often the router will search for updates to the source content. Set a bandwidth limit for clients. https://www.peplink.com 186 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click Save & Apply Now to activate the changes. A screenshot of the display after configuration is shown below:
The content will be synced regularly according to the time set in the Period that was configured earlier. If you want to activate the sync manually, you can click the icon. The Status column will display the sync progress. When the sync is completed, a summary will be displayed, as shown in the screenshot below:
To access the content, open a browser in the MFAs client and enter the domain details that were configured earlier (such as http://mytest.com ). 17.3 Congure an application for ContentHub MediaFast routers allow you to configure and publish any application from the router itself by using one of the supported frameworks below:
Python (version 2.7.12) Ruby (version 2.3.3) Node.js (version 6.9.2) Install the desired framework under Package Manager as shown below:
https://www.peplink.com 187 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink After installing the framework, change the Type to Application and configure the website. The setting is the same as the Website type (refer to the description in the section above). https://www.peplink.com 188 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Application type content need to be packed as explained below:
1. Implement two bash script files, start.sh and stop.sh in the root folder, to start and stop your application. The MediaFast router will only execute start.sh and stop.sh when the corresponding website is enabled and disabled respectively. 2. Compress the application files and the bash script to .tar.gz format. 3. Upload this tar file to the router. https://www.peplink.com 189 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 18 Docker MediaFast enabled routers can host Docker containers when running Firmware 7.1 or later. Docker is an open platform for developing, shipping, and running applications. From Firmware version 7.1.0 and upwards, it is possible to install and run Docker Containers on your Pepwave routers with MediaFast, such as the MAX HD2 and the MAX HD4. Due to the nature of Docker and its unlimited variables, this feature is supported by Pepwave up to the point of creating a running Docker Container. Information about Docker can be found on the Docker Documentation site:
https://docs.docker.com/ 2 This will allow you to run a file sharing platform (ownCloud), a web server (WordPress, Joomla!)
, a learning platform (Moodle), or a visualisation tool for viewing large scale data (Kibana). When creating a new Docker Container, the Pepwave router will search through the Docker Hub repository. https://hub.docker.com/explore/ 7 For detailed configuration instructions, refer to our knowledge base:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/how-to-run-a-docker-application-on-a-peplink-mediafast-router/1602 1 https://www.peplink.com 190 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 19 KVM MediaFast enabled routers now support KVM. Users will have to download and install Virtual Machine Manager to manage the KVM virtual machines. Through this, users are able to virtualise a Linux environment. For detailed configuration instructions, refer to our knowledge base articles:
1. How to install a Virtual Machine on Peplink/Pepwave - MediaFast/ContentHub Routers 2. How to Install Virtual Machine with USB storage on Peplink/Pepwave -
MediaFast/ContentHub Routers https://www.peplink.com 191 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 20 QoS 20.1 User Groups LAN and PPTP clients can be categorized into three user groups: Manager, Staff, and Guest . This menu allows you to define rules and assign client IP addresses or subnets to a user group. You can apply different bandwidth and traffic prioritization policies on each user group in the Bandwidth Control and Application sections (note that the options available here vary by model). The table is automatically sorted by rule precedence. The smaller and more specific subnets are put towards the top of the table and have higher precedence; larger and less specific subnets are placed towards the bottom. Click the Add button to define clients and their user group. Click the button to remove the defined rule. Two default rules are pre-defined and put at the bottom. They are All DHCP reservation clients and Everyone , and they cannot be removed. The All DHCP reservation client represents the LAN clients defined in the DHCP Reservation table on the LAN settings page. Everyone represents all clients that are not defined in any rule above. Click on a rule to change its group. Add / Edit User Group Grouped by From the drop-down menu, choose whether you are going to define the client(s) by an IP Address or a Subnet . If IP Address is selected, enter a name IP reservation table address. If Subnet is selected, enter a subnet address and specify its subnet mask. in DHCP defined client's LAN or a User Group This field is to define which User Group the specified subnet / IP address belongs to. Once users have been assigned to a user group, their internet traffic will be restricted by rules defined for that particular group. Please refer to the following two sections for details. https://www.peplink.com 192 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 20.2 Bandwidth Control This section is to define how much minimum bandwidth will be reserved to each user group when a WAN connection is in full load . When this feature is enabled, a slider with two indicators will be shown. You can move the indicators to adjust each group's weighting. The lower part of the table shows the corresponding reserved download and uploads bandwidth value of each connection. By default, 50% of bandwidth has been reserved for Manager, 30% for Staff, and 20% for Guest. You can define a maximum download speed (over all WAN connections) and upload speed (for each WAN connection) that each individual Staff and Guest member can consume. No limit can be imposed on individual Managers. By default, download and upload bandwidth limits are set to unlimited (set as 0 ). 20.3 Application Queue This section is to define the QoS Application Queue. You can set guaranteed bandwidth for a queue and assign it to applications. Click the Add button to create the QoS Application Queue. https://www.peplink.com 193 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Name This setting specifies a name for the QoS Application Queue. Add Queue Bandwidth Bandwidth to be reserved (for each WAN connection) for this queue. When WAN is congested, this bandwidth will remain available for applications assigned to this queue. Borrow Spare Bandwidth Enable this option if you want this queue to utilize WAN's unused bandwidth. 20.4 Application 20.4.1 Application Prioritization On many Pepwave routers, you can choose whether to apply the same prioritization settings to all user groups or customize the settings for each group. Three application priority levels can be set: High , Normal , and Low . Pepwave routers can detect various application traffic types by inspecting the packet content. Select an application by choosing a supported application, or by defining a custom application manually. The priority preference of supported applications is placed at the top of the table. Custom applications are at the bottom. https://www.peplink.com 194 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 20.4.2 Prioritization for Custom Applications Click the Add button to define a custom application. Click the button to delete the custom application in the corresponding row. in the Action column When Supported Applications is selected, the Pepwave router will inspect network traffic and prioritize the selected applications. Alternatively, you can select Custom Applications and define the application by providing the protocol, scope, port number, and DSCP value. 20.4.3 DSL/Cable Optimization WAN connections higher have DSL/cable-based download bandwidth. When a DSL/cable circuit's uplink is congested, the download bandwidth will be affected. Users will not be able to download data at full speed until the uplink becomes less congested. DSL/Cable Optimization can relieve such an issue. When it is enabled, the download speed will become less affected by the upload traffic. By default, this feature is disabled. upload bandwidth lower and 20.4.4 SpeedFusion VPN Trafc Optimization To enable this option to allow SpeedFusion VPN traffic has highest priority when WAN is congested. https://www.peplink.com 195 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 21 Firewall A firewall is a mechanism that selectively filters data traffic between the WAN side (the Internet) and the LAN side of the network. It can protect the local network from potential hacker attacks, access to offensive websites, and/or other inappropriate uses. The firewall functionality of Pepwave routers supports the selective filtering of data traffic in both directions:
Outbound (LAN to WAN) Inbound (WAN to LAN) Internal Network (VLAN to VLAN) Local Service The firewall also supports the following functionality:
Intrusion detection and DoS prevention Web blocking With SpeedFusion TM enabled, the firewall rules also apply to VPN tunneled traffic. https://www.peplink.com 196 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 21.1 Access Rules Outbound Firewall Rules The outbound firewall settings are located at Advanced > Firewall > Access Rules. To enable or disable the Outbound Firewall to manage device local network traffic, click on the help icon and click here , the screen will show below. https://www.peplink.com 197 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To utilize the Outbound Firewall Rule to block the Peplink device from contacting InControl 2. may refer to the link below:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/faq-prevent-device-reaching-incontrol-2./63f48fdfd466df34ab475f55/
Note Click Add Rule to display the following screen:
Inbound Firewall Rules Inbound firewall settings are located at Advanced > Firewall > Access Rules. Click Add Rule to display the following screen:
https://www.peplink.com 198 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Internal Network Firewall Rules Internal Network firewall settings are located at Advanced > Firewall > Access Rules . Click Add Rule to display the following window:
https://www.peplink.com 199 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Inbound / Outbound / Internal Network Firewall Settings Rule Name This setting specifies a name for the firewall rule. This setting specifies whether the firewall rule should take effect. If the box is checked, the firewall rule takes effect. If the traffic matches the specified protocol/IP/port, actions will be taken by the Pepwave router based on the other parameters of the rule. If the box is not checked, the firewall rule does not take effect. The Pepwave router will disregard the other parameters of the rule. Enable Click the dropdown menu next to the checkbox to place this firewall rule on a time schedule. WAN Connection
(Inbound) Select the WAN connection that this firewall rule should apply to. This setting specifies the protocol to be matched. Via a drop-down menu, the following protocols can be specified:
Any TCP UDP ICMP DSCP IP Protocol Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can be used to automatically fill in the protocol and port number of common Internet services
(e.g., HTTP, HTTPS, etc.) After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu, the protocol and port number remains manually modifiable. This specifies the source IP address(es) and port number(s) to be matched for the firewall rule. A single address, or a network, can be specified as the Source IP &
Port setting, as indicated by the following screenshot:
In addition, a single port, or a range of ports, can be specified for the Source IP &
Port settings. This specifies the destination IP address(es) and port number(s) to be matched for the firewall rule. A single address, or a network, can be specified as the Destination IP & Port setting, as indicated by the following screenshot:
In addition, a single port, or a range of ports, can be specified for the Destination IP & Port settings. Source IP & Port Destination IP &
Port https://www.peplink.com 200 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This setting specifies the action to be taken by the router upon encountering traffic that matches the both of the following:
Action Source IP & port Destination IP & port With the value of Allow for the Action setting, the matching traffic passes through the router (to be routed to the destination). If the value of the Action setting is set to Deny , the matching traffic does not pass through the router (and is discarded). This setting specifies whether or not to log matched firewall events. The logged messages are shown on the page Status>Event Log . A sample message is as follows:
Event Logging Aug 13 23:47:44 Denied CONN=Ethernet WAN SRC=20.3.2.1 DST=192.168.1.20 LEN=48 PROTO=TCP SPT=2260 DPT=80 CONN: The connection where the log entry refers to SRC: Source IP address DST: Destination IP address LEN: Packet length PROTO: Protocol SPT: Source port DPT: Destination port Click Save to store your changes. To create an additional firewall rule, click Add Rule and repeat the above steps. To change a rules priority, simply drag and drop the rule:
Hold the left mouse button on the rule. Move it to the desired position. Drop it by releasing the mouse button. To remove a rule, click the button. Rules are matched from top to bottom. If a connection matches any one of the upper rules, the matching process will stop. If none of the rules match, the Default rule will be applied. By https://www.peplink.com 201 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink default, the Default rule is set as Allow for Outbound, Inbound and Internal Network access. Tip If the default inbound rule is set to Allow for NAT-enabled WANs, no inbound Allow firewall rules will be required for inbound port forwarding and inbound NAT mapping rules. However, if the default inbound rule is set as Deny , a corresponding Allow firewall rule will be required. Intrusion Detection and DoS Prevention Pepwave routers can detect and prevent intrusions and denial-of-service (DoS) attacks from the
, check the Enable check box, and press the Save Internet. To turn on this feature, click button. When this feature is enabled, the Pepwave router will detect and prevent the following kinds of intrusions and denial-of-service attacks. Port scan o o o o o o NMAP FIN/URG/PSH Xmas tree Another Xmas tree Null scan SYN/RST SYN/FIN SYN flood prevention Ping flood attack prevention Local Service Firewall Rules For every WAN inbound traffic to local service, rules will be matched to take the defined action. The Local Service firewall settings are located at Advanced > Firewall > Access Rules . Click Add Rule to display the following window:
https://www.peplink.com 202 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Local Service Firewall Settings Rule Name This setting specifies a name for the firewall rule. This setting specifies whether the firewall rule should take effect. If the box is checked, the firewall rule takes effect. If the traffic matches the specified protocol/IP/port, actions will be taken by Peplink Balance based on the other parameters of the rule. If the box is not checked, the firewall rule does not take effect. The Peplink Balance will disregard the other parameters of the rule. Click the dropdown menu next to the checkbox to place this firewall rule on a time schedule. This option allows you to define the supported local service to be matched. If Any is chosen, the firewall rule will match to all supported local services from the list. Via a drop-down menu, the following services can be specified:
Any SpeedFusion / PepVPN Handshake SpeedFusion / PepVPN Data Port Web Admin Access DNS Server SNMP Server KVM Management Port KVM VNC Port FusionSIM Agent / Remote SIM Proxy Select the WAN connection that this firewall rule should apply to. This specifies the source IP address and IP Network to be matched for the firewall rule. With the value of Allow for the Action setting, the matching traffic passes through the router (to be routed to the destination). If the value of the Action setting is set to Deny , the matching traffic does not pass through the router (and is discarded). Enable Service WAN Connection Source Action https://www.peplink.com 203 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Event Logging This setting specifies whether or not to log matched firewall events. The logged messages are shown on the page Status>Event Log . A sample message is as follows:
Aug 13 23:47:44 Denied CONN=Ethernet WAN SRC=20.3.2.1 DST=192.168.1.20 LEN=48 PROTO=TCP SPT=2260 DPT=80 CONN: The connection where the log entry refers to SRC: Source IP address DST: Destination IP address LEN: Packet length PROTO: Protocol SPT: Source port DPT: Destination port https://www.peplink.com 204 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 21.2 Content Blocking 21.2.1 Application Blocking Choose applications to be blocked from LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusion VPN peer clients' access, except for those on the Exempted User Groups or Exempted Subnets defined below. 21.2.2 Web Blocking Defines website domain names to be blocked from LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusion VPN peer clients'
access except for those on the Exempted User Groups or Exempted Subnets defined below. If "foobar.com" is entered, any web site with a host name ending in foobar.com will be blocked, e.g. www.foobar.com, foobar.com, etc. However, "myfoobar.com" will not be blocked. You may enter the wild card ".*" at the end of a domain name to block any web site with a host name having the domain name in the middle. If you enter "foobar.*", then "www.foobar.com",
"www.foobar.co.jp", or "foobar.co.uk" will be blocked. Placing the wild card in any other position https://www.peplink.com 205 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink is not supported. The device will inspect and look for blocked domain names on all HTTP and HTTPS traffic. 21.2.3 Customized Domains Enter an appropriate website address, and the Pepwave MAX will block and disallow LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusionTM peer clients to access these websites. Exceptions can be added using the instructions in Sections 20.1.3.2 and 20.1.3.3. You may enter the wild card ".*" at the end of a domain name to block any web site with a host name having the domain name in the middle. For example, If you enter "foobar.*," then
"www.foobar.com," "www.foobar.co.jp," or "foobar.co.uk" will be blocked. Placing the wild card in any other position is not supported. The Pepwave MAX will inspect and look for blocked domain names on all HTTP traffic. Secure web (HTTPS) traffic is not supported. 21.2.4 Exempted User Groups Check and select pre-defined user group(s) who can be exempted from the access blocking rules. User groups can be defined at QoS>User Groups section. Please refer to Section 17.1 for details. 21.2.5 Exempted Subnets With the subnet defined in the field, clients on the particular subnet(s) can be exempted from the access blocking rules. https://www.peplink.com 206 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 22 Routing Protocols 22.1 OSPF & RIPv2 The Pepwave supports OSPF and RIPv2 dynamic routing protocols. Click the Advanced tab from the top bar, and then click the Routing Protocols > OSPF &
RIPv2 item on the sidebar to reach the following menu:
OSPF Router ID This field determines the ID of the router. By default, this is specified as the WAN IP address. If you want to specify your own ID, enter it into the Custom field. Area This is an overview of the OSPF areas that you have defined. Clicking on the name under Area allows you to configure the connection. To define a new area, click Add . To delete an existing area, click on the
. https://www.peplink.com 207 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink OSPF Settings Area ID Assign a name to be applied to this group. Machines linked to this group will send and receive related OSPF packets, while unlinked machines will ignore them. Link Type Choose the type of network that this area will use. Authentication If an authentication method is used, select one from this drop-down menu. Available options are MD5 and Text . Authentication key(s) may be input next to the drop-down menu after selecting an authentication method. Interfaces Select the interface(s) that this area will use to listen to and deliver OSPF packets. To access RIPv2 settings, click on
. https://www.peplink.com 208 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink RIPv2 Settings Authentication If an authentication method is used, select one from this drop-down menu. Available options are MD5 and Text . Authentication key(s) may be input next to the drop-down menu after selecting an authentication method. Interfaces Select the interface(s) that this area will use to listen to and deliver RIPv2 packets. OSPF & RIPv2 Route Advertisement SpeedFusion VPN Route Isolation Network Advertising Isolate SpeedFusion VPN peers from each other. Received SpeedFusion VPN routes will not be forwarded to other SpeedFusion VPN peers to reduce bandwidth consumption. . Networks to be advertised over OSPF & RIPv2. If no network is selected, all LAN /
VLAN networks will be advertised by default. Static Route Advertising Enabling OSPF & RIPv2 Route Advertising allows it to advertise LAN static routes over OSPF & RIPv2. Static routes on the Excluded Networks table will not be advertised. 22.2 BGP Click the Advanced tab along the top bar, and then click the BGP item on the sidebar to configure BGP. Click the " x " to delete a BGP profile. Click " Add " to create a new BGP profile. https://www.peplink.com 209 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink BGP Profile Name This field specifies the name that represents this profile. Enable When this box is checked, this BGP profile will be enabled. If it is left unchecked, it will be disabled. Interface The interface in which the BGP neighbor is located. Router ID Autonomous System This field specifies the unique IP as the identifier of the local device running BGP. The Autonomous System Number (ASN) assigned to this profile. Neighbor BGP Neighbors and their details. IP address The IP address of the Neighbor. Autonomous System The Neighbor's ASN. Multihop/TTL This field determines the Time-to-live (TTL) of BGP packets. Leave this field blank if the BGP neighbor is directly connected, otherwise you must specify a TTL value. This option should be used if the configured Neighbors IP address does not match the selected Interfaces network subnets. The TTL value must be between 2 to 255. Password
(Optional) Assign a password for MD5 authentication of BGP sessions. AS-Path Prepending:
AS path to be prepended to the routes received from this Neighbor. Values must be ASN and separated by commas. For example: inputting "64530,64531" will prepend "64530, 64531" to received https://www.peplink.com 210 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink routes. Hold Time Wait time in seconds for a keepalive message from a Neighbor before considering the BGP connection as stalled. The value must be either 0 (infinite hold time) or between 3 and 65535 inclusively. Default: 240 Next Hop Self Enable this option to advertise your own source address as the next hop when propagating routes. iBGP Local Preference BFD This is the metric advertised to iBGP Neighbors to indicate the preference for external routes. The value must be between 0 to 4294967295 inclusively. Default: 100 Enable this option to add Bidirectional Forwarding Detection for path failure. All directly connected Neighbors that use the same physical interface share the same BFD settings. All mulithop Neighbors share the same multihop BFD settings. You can configure BFD settings in the BGP profile listing page after this option is enabled. Network Advertising Static Route Advertising Custom Route Advertising Advertise OSPF Route Set Community Select the Networks that will be advertised to the BGP Neighbor. Enable this option to advertise static LAN routes. Static routes that match the Excluded Networks table will not be advertised. Additional routes to be advertised to the BGP Neighbor. When this box is checked, every learnt OSPF route will be advertised. Assign a prefix to a Community. https://www.peplink.com 211 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Community:
Two numbers in new-format. e.g. 65000:21344 Well-known communities:
no-export 65535:65281 no-advertise 65535:65282 no-export-subconfed 65535:65283 no-peer 65535:65284 Route Prefix:
Comma separated networks. e.g. 172.168.1.0/24,192.168.1.0/28 Filter Mode This field allows for the selection of the filter mode for route import. None : All BGP routes will be accepted. Accept : Routes in "Restricted Networks" will be accepted, routes not in the list will be rejected. Reject : Routes in "Blocked Networks" will be rejected, routes not in the list will be accepted. Restricted Networks /
Blocked Networks This field specifies the network(s) in the route import entry. Exact Match: When this box is checked, only routes with the same Network and Subnet Mask will be filtered. Otherwise, routes within the Networks and Subnets will be filtered. Filter Mode This field allows for the selection of the filter mode for route export. https://www.peplink.com 212 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink None : All BGP routes will be accepted. Accept : Routes in "Restricted Networks" will be accepted, routes not in the list will be rejected. Reject : Routes in "Blocked Networks" will be rejected, routes not in the list will be accepted. Restricted Networks /
Blocked Networks This field specifies the network(s) in the route export entry. Exact Match: When this box is checked, only routes with the same Network and Subnet Mask will be filtered. Otherwise, routes within the Networks and Subnets will be filtered. Export to other BGP Profile When this box is checked, routes learnt from this BGP profile will be exported to other BGP profiles. Export to OSPF When this box is checked, routes learnt from this BGP profile will be exported to the OSPF routing protocol. https://www.peplink.com 213 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 23 Remote User Access A remote-access VPN connection allows an individual user to connect to a private business network from a remote location using a laptop or desktop computer connected to the Internet. Networks routed by a Pepwave router can be remotely accessed via OpenVPN, L2TP with IPsec or PPTP. To configure this feature, navigate to Advanced > Remote User Access and choose the required VPN type. Remote User Access Settings Enable When this box is checked, this Remote User Access profile will be enabled. If it is left unchecked, it will be disabled. This field allows you to select the VPN type for the remote user access connection. The available options are:
L2TP with IPsec VPN Type If L2TP with IPsec is selected, it may need to enter the pre-shared key for the remote user access. PPTP https://www.peplink.com 214 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink If PPTP selected, there is no additional configuration required. The Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is an obsolete method for implementing virtual private networks. PPTP has many well known security issues OpenVPN If the OpenVPN is selected, the OpenVPN Client profile can be downloaded from the Status > Device page after the configuration has been saved. You have a choice between 2 different OpenVPN Client profiles:
"Route all traffic" profile Using this profile, VPN clients will send all the traffic through the OpenVPN tunnel
"Split tunnel" profile Using this profile, VPN clients will ONLY send those traffic designated to the untagged LAN and VLAN segment through the OpenVPN tunnel. Pre-shared Key If L2TP with IPsec is selected in the VPN Type, enter the pre shared key in the text field. Please note that remote devices will need this preshared key to access the Balance. Disabled Weak Ciphers You may click the When checked, weak ciphers such as 3DES will be disabled. button to show in the Pre-shared key and enable this option. Please note: Legacy and Android devices may not able to connect. Connection Security Refresh If OpenVPN is selected in the VPN Type, this settings is for specifying the interval for refreshing the connection. Listen On This setting is for specifying the WAN IP addresses that allow remote user access. Port If OpenVPN is selected in the VPN Type, the Port setting specifies the port(s) that correspond to the service. Determine the method of authenticating remote users:
Local User Accounts Authentication This setting allows you to define the Remote User Accounts. Click Add https://www.peplink.com 215 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink to input username and password to create an account. After adding the user accounts, you can click on a username to edit the account password. Note:
The username must contain lowercase letters, numerics, underscore(_), dash(-), at sign(@), and period(.) only. The password must be between 8 and 12 characters long LDAP Server Enter the matching LDAP server details to allow for LDAP server authentication. Radius Server Enter the matching Radius server details to allow for Radius server authentication. Active Diretory Enter the matching Active Directory details to allow for Active Directory server authentication. https://www.peplink.com 216 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24 Miscellaneous Settings The miscellaneous settings include configuration for High Availability, Certificate Manager, service forwarding, service passthrough, GPS forwarding, GPIO, Groupe Networks and SIM Toolkit (depending the feature is supported on the model of Peplink router that is being used). 24.1 High Availability Many Pepwave routers support high availability (HA) configurations via an open standard virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP, RFC 3768). In an HA configuration, two Pepwave routers provide redundancy and failover in a master-slave arrangement. In the event that the master unit is down, the slave unit becomes active. High availability will be disabled automatically where there is a drop-in connection configured on a LAN bypass port. In the diagram, the WAN ports of each Pepwave router connect to the router and to the modem. Both Pepwave routers connect to the same LAN switch via a LAN port. An elaboration on the technical details of the implementation of the virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP, RFC 3768) by Pepwave routers follows:
In an HA configuration, the two Pepwave routers communicate with each other using VRRP over the LAN. The two Pepwave routers broadcast heartbeat signals to the LAN at a frequency of one heartbeat signal per second. In the event that no heartbeat signal from the master Pepwave router is received in 3 seconds (or longer) since the last heartbeat signal, the slave Pepwave router becomes active. The slave Pepwave router initiates the WAN connections and binds to a previously https://www.peplink.com 217 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink configured LAN IP address. At a subsequent point when the master Pepwave router recovers, it will once again become active. You can configure high availability at Advanced > Misc. Settings > High Availability . Interface for Master Router Interface for Slave Router High Availability Enable Checking this box specifies that the Pepwave router is part of a high availability configuration. Group Number This number identifies a pair of Pepwave routers operating in a high availability configuration. The two Pepwave routers in the pair must have the same Group Number value. Preferred Role This setting specifies whether the Pepwave router operates in master or slave mode. Click the corresponding radio button to set the role of the unit. One of the units in the pair must be configured as the master, and the other unit must be configured as the slave. Resume Master Role Upon Recovery This option is displayed when Master mode is selected in Preferred Role . If this option is enabled, once the device has recovered from an outage, it will take over and resume its Master role from the slave unit. Configuration Sync. This option is displayed when Slave mode is selected in Preferred Role . If this option is enabled and the Master Serial Number entered matches with the actual master unit's, the master unit will automatically transfer the configuration to this unit. Please make sure the LAN IP Address and the Subnet Mask fields are set correctly in the LAN settings page. You can refer to the Event Log for the configuration synchronization status. Master Serial Number If Configuration Sync. is checked, the serial number of the master unit is required here for the feature to work properly. Virtual IP The HA pair must share the same Virtual IP . The Virtual IP and the LAN https://www.peplink.com 218 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Administration IP must be under the same network. LAN Administration IP This setting specifies a LAN IP address to be used for accessing administration functionality. This address should be unique within the LAN. Subnet Mask This setting specifies the subnet mask of the LAN. Important Note For Pepwave routers in NAT mode, the virtual IP (VIP) should be set as the default gateway for all hosts on the LAN segment. For example, a firewall sitting behind the Pepwave router should set its default gateway as the virtual IP instead of the IP of the master router. In drop-in mode, no other configuration needs to be set. https://www.peplink.com 219 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Please note that the drop-in WAN cannot be configured as a LAN bypass port while it is configured for high availability. https://www.peplink.com 220 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.2 RADIUS Server RADIUS Server settings are located at Advanced > Misc. Settings > RADIUS Server . To configure the Authentication Server and Accounting Server, click New Profile to display the following screen:
Name Host Port Authentication Server This field is for specifying a name to represent this profile. Specifies the IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server host. This setting specifies the UDP destination port for authentication requests. By default, the port number is 1812. Secret This field is for entering the secret key for communicating to the RADIUS server. https://www.peplink.com 221 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Name Host Port Accounting Server This field is for specifying a name to represent this profile. Specifies the IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server host. This setting specifies the UDP destination port for accounting requests. By default, the port number is 1813. Secret This field is for entering the secret key for communicating to the RADIUS server. https://www.peplink.com 222 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.3 Certicate Manager This section allows for certificates to be assigned to the local VPN, Web Admin SSL, Captive Portal SSL, OpenVPN CA, Wi-Fi WAN Client certificate and Wi-Fi WAN CA Certificate. The following knowledge base article describes how to create self-signed certificates and import it to a Peplink Product. https://forum.peplink.com/t/how-to-create-a-self-signed-certificate-and-import-it-to-a-peplink-pro duct/
https://www.peplink.com 223 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.4 Service Forwarding Service forwarding settings are located at Advanced > Misc. Settings > Service Forwarding . Service Forwarding SMTP Forwarding When this option is enabled, all outgoing SMTP connections destined for any host at TCP port 25 will be intercepted. These connections will be redirected to a specified SMTP server and port number. SMTP server settings for each WAN can be specified after selecting Enable . Web Proxy Forwarding When this option is enabled, all outgoing connections destined for the proxy server specified in Web Proxy Interception Settings will be intercepted. These connections will be redirected to a specified web proxy server and port number. Web proxy interception settings and proxy server settings for each WAN can be specified after selecting Enable . DNS Forwarding When this option is enabled, all outgoing DNS lookups will be intercepted and redirected to the built-in DNS name server. If any LAN device is using the DNS name servers of a WAN connection, you may want to enable this option to enhance the DNS availability without modifying the DNS server setting of the clients. The built-in DNS name server will distribute DNS lookups to corresponding DNS servers of all available WAN connections. In this case, DNS service will not be interrupted, even if any WAN connection is down. Custom Service Forwarding When custom service forwarding is enabled, outgoing traffic with the specified TCP port will be forwarded to a local or remote server by defining its IP address and port number. 24.4.1 SMTP Forwarding Some ISPs require their users to send e-mails via the ISPs SMTP server. All outgoing SMTP connections are blocked except those connecting to the ISPs. Pepwave routers support intercepting and redirecting all outgoing SMTP connections (destined for TCP port 25) via a WAN connection to the WANs corresponding SMTP server. https://www.peplink.com 224 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To enable the feature, select Enable under SMTP Forwarding Setup . Check Enable Forwarding for the WAN connection(s) that needs forwarding. Under SMTP Server , enter the ISPs e-mail server host name or IP address. Under SMTP Port , enter the TCP port number for each WAN. The Pepwave router will intercept SMTP connections. Choose a WAN port according to the outbound policy, and then forward the connection to the SMTP server if the chosen WAN has enabled forwarding. If the forwarding is disabled for a WAN connection, SMTP connections for the WAN will be simply be forwarded to the connections original destination. Note If you want to route all SMTP connections only to particular WAN connection(s), you should create a custom rule in outbound policy (see Section 14.2 ). 24.4.2 Web Proxy Forwarding When this feature is enabled, the Pepwave router will intercept all outgoing connections destined for the proxy server specified in Web Proxy Interception Settings , choose a WAN connection with reference to the outbound policy, and then forward them to the specified web proxy server and port number. Redirected server settings for each WAN can be set here. If forwarding is disabled for a WAN, web proxy connections for the WAN will be simply forwarded to the connections original destination. https://www.peplink.com 225 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.4.3 DNS Forwarding When DNS forwarding is enabled, all clients outgoing DNS requests will also be intercepted and forwarded to the built-in DNS proxy server. 24.4.4 Custom Service Forwarding After clicking the enable checkbox, enter your TCP port for traffic heading to the router, and then specify the IP Address and Port of the server you wish to forward to the service to. https://www.peplink.com 226 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.5 Service Passthrough Service passthrough settings can be found at Advanced > Misc. Settings > Service Passthrough . Some Internet services need to be specially handled in a multi-WAN environment. Pepwave routers can handle these services such that Internet applications do not notice being behind a multi-WAN router. Settings for service passthrough support are available here. Service Passthrough Support Session initiation protocol, aka SIP, is a voice-over-IP protocol. The Pepwave router can act as a SIP application layer gateway (ALG) which binds connections for the same SIP session to the same WAN connection and translate IP address in the SIP packets correctly in NAT mode. Such passthrough support is always enabled, and there are two modes for selection:
Standard Mode and Compatibility Mode . If your SIP servers signal port number is non-standard, you can check the box Define custom signal ports and input the port numbers to the text boxes. With this option enabled, protocols that provide audio-visual communication sessions will be defined on any packet network and pass through the Pepwave router. FTP sessions consist of two TCP connections; one for control and one for data. In a multi-WAN situation, they must be routed to the same WAN connection. Otherwise, problems will arise in transferring files. By default, the Pepwave router monitors TCP control connections on port 21 for any FTP connections and binds TCP connections of the same FTP session to the same WAN. If you have an FTP server listening on a port number other than 21, you can check Define custom control ports and enter the port numbers in the text boxes. The Pepwave router monitors outgoing TFTP connections and routes any incoming TFTP data packets back to the client. Select Enable if you want to enable TFTP passthrough support. SIP H.323 FTP TFTP https://www.peplink.com 227 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink IPsec NAT-T This field is for enabling the support of IPsec NAT-T passthrough. UDP ports 500, 4500, and 10000 are monitored by default. You may add more custom data ports that your IPsec system uses by checking Define custom ports . If the VPN contains IPsec site-to-site VPN traffic, check Route IPsec Site-to-Site VPN and choose the WAN connection to route the traffic to. 24.6 UART Selected Pepwave MAX routers feature a RS-232 serial interface on the built-in terminal block. The RS-232 serial interface can be used to connect to a serial device and make it accessible over an TCP/IP network. The serial interface can be enabled and parameters can be set on the web admin page under Advanced > UART . Make sure they match the serial device you are connecting to. https://www.peplink.com 228 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink There are 4 pins i.e. TX, RX, RTS, CTS on the terminal block for serial connection and they correspond to the pins in a DB-9 connector as follows:
DB-9 Pepwave MAX Terminal Block Pin 1 Pin 2 Rx (rated -+25V) Pin 3 Tx (rated -+12V) Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Pin 7 RTS Pin 8 CTS Pin 9 The RS232 serial interface is not an isolated RS232. External galvanic isolation may be added if required. Be sure to check whether your serial cable is a null modem cable, commonly known as crossover cable, or a straight through cable. If in doubt, swap Rx and Tx, and RTS and CTS, at the other end and give it another go. Once connected, your serial device should be accessible on your Pepwave MAX router LAN IP address at the specified TCP port. https://www.peplink.com 229 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.7 GPS Forwarding Using the GPS forwarding feature, some Pepwave routers can automatically send GPS reports to a specified server. To set up GPS forwarding, navigate to Advanced > Misc. Settings > GPS Forwarding . Enable Check this box to turn on GPS forwarding. GPS Forwarding Server Enter the name/IP address of the server that will receive GPS data. Also specify a port number, protocol ( UDP or TCP ), and a report interval of between 1 and 10 seconds. Click to save these settings. GPS Report Format Choose from NMEA or TAIP format for sending GPS reports. NMEA Sentence Type If youve chosen to send GPS reports in NMEA format, select one or more sentence types for sending the data ( GPRMC , GPGGA , GPVTG , GPGSA , and GPGSV ). Vehicle ID The vehicle ID will be appended in the last field of the NMEA sentence. Note that the NMEA sentence will become customized and non-standard. TAIP Sentence Type/TAIP ID
(optional) If youve chosen to send GPS reports in TAIP format, select one or more sentence types for sending the data ( PVPosition / Velocity Solution and CPCompact Velocity Solution ). You can also optionally include an ID number in the TAIP ID field. https://www.peplink.com 230 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.8 Ignition Sensing Ignition Sensing detects the ignition signal status of a vehicle it is installed in. This feature allows the cellular router to start up or shut down when the engine of that vehicle is started or turned off. The time delay setting between ignition off and power down of the router is a configurable setting, which allows the router to stay on for a period of time after the engine of a vehicle is turned off. Ignition Sensing installation Function I/O optional *
IGN I/P connected to positive feed on the ignition **
Colour Wire Brown Orange DC IN
DC IN
connected to permanent negative feed (ground) Black connected to permanent positive feed (power) Red
* Currently not functional; will be used for additional features in future firmware.
** Connecting IGN I/P is optional and is needed only if the Ignition Sensing feature is configured. https://www.peplink.com 231 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Connectivity diagram for devices with 4-pin connector Connectivity diagram for devices with terminal block connection https://www.peplink.com 232 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink GPIO Menu Note: This feature is applicable for certain models that come with a GPIO interface. Ignition Sensing options can be found in Advanced > Misc. Settings > GPIO. The configurable option for Ignition Input is Delay; the time in seconds that the router stays powered on after the ignition is turned off. The O/P (connected to the I/O pin on a 4 pin connector) can be configured as a digital input, a digital output, or an analog input. Digital Input - the connection supports input sensing; it reads the external input and determines if the settings should be 'High' (on) or 'Low' (off). Digital Output - when there is a healthy WAN connection, the output pin is marked as 'High' (on). Otherwise, it will be marked as 'Low' (off). Note: The Digital Output state (on/off) upon rebooting the device may vary depending on the model, eg. MAX BR1 MK2 = Persistent; MAX Transit Mini with ContentHub = Reset to default, etc . Analog Input - to be confirmed. In most cases, it should read the external input and determine the voltage level. https://www.peplink.com 233 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.9 NTP Server Pepwave routers can now serve as a local NTP server. Upon start up, it is now able to provide connected devices with the accurate time, precise UTC from either an external NTP server or via GPS and ensuring that connected devices always receive the correct time. Compatible with: BR1 ENT, BR1 Pro CAT-20/5G, 700 HW3, HD2/4, Transit NTP Server setting can be found via: Advanced > Misc. Settings > NTP Server Time Settings can be found at System > Time > Time Settings https://www.peplink.com 234 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.10 Grouped Networks Advanced > Misc. Settings > Grouped Networks allows to configure destination networks in grouped format. Select Add group to create a new group with single IPaddresses or subnets from different VLANs. The created network groups can be used in outbound policies, firewall rules. https://www.peplink.com 235 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.11 Remote SIM Management The Remote SIM management is accessible via Advanced > Misc Settings > Remote SIM Management . By default, this feature is disabled. Please note that a limited number of Pepwave routers support the SIM Injector, may refer to the link: https://www.peplink.com/products/sim-injector/ or Appendix B for more details on FusionSIM Manual. Remote SIM Host Settings Remote SIM Host Settings Active LAN Discovery Remote SIM Host Check this box to enable Auto LAN discovery of the remote SIM server.. Enter the public IP address of the SIM Injector. If you enter IP addresses here, it is not necessary to tick the Auto LAN Discovery box above. You may define the Remote SIM information by clicking the Add Remote SIM . Here, you can enable Data Roaming and custom APN for your SIM cards. https://www.peplink.com 236 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Add Remote SIM Settings SIM Server Add a new SIM Server SIM Server - Serial Number Enter the serial number of SIM Server SIM Server - Name This optional field allows you define a name for the SIM Server SIM Slot Click the drop-down menu and choose which SIM slot you want to connect. SIM Slot - Name This optional field allows you to define a name for the SIM slot. Data Roaming Enables data roaming on this particular SIM card. Operator Settings (for LTE//HSPA/EDGE/GPRS Only) This setting allows you to configure the APN settings of your connection. If Auto is selected, the mobile operator should be detected automatically. The connected device will be configured and connection will be made automatically. If there is any difficulty in making a connection, you may select Custom to enter your carriers APN, Username and Password settings manually. The correct values can be obtained from your carrier. The default and recommended setting is Auto. https://www.peplink.com 237 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.12 SIM Toolkit The SIM Toolkit, accessible via Advanced > Misc Settings > SIM Toolkit , supports two functionalities, USSD and SMS. USSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) is a protocol used by mobile phones to communicate with their service providers computers. One of the most common uses is to query the available balance. Enter your USSD code under the USSD Code text field and click Submit . You will receive a confirmation. To check the SMS response, click Get . After a few minutes you will receive a response to your USSD code https://www.peplink.com 238 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SMS The SMS option allows you to read SMS (text) messages that have been sent to the SIM in your Pepwave router. https://www.peplink.com 239 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 24.13 UDP Relay You may define the UDP relay by clicking the Advanced > Misc Settings > UDP Relay . You can click LAN/VLAN/SpeedFusion VPN. to enable the UDP relay to relay UDP Broadcast or Multicast traffic for Click New UDP Relay Rule to define the relay rule. UDP Relay Name Port Multicast This field is for specifying a name to represent this profile. This feid is to enter the specific port number for the UDP relay If Multicast is not selected, it will broadcast relay rule. If Multicast is selected, you may need to enter a valid multicast address. Secure Network Select the specific connection as a source network to where the device is to relay UDP Broadcast packets. Destination Network You may select the specific connection from the drop-down list or may custom combination network as a destination network that receives the UDP packet relays. https://www.peplink.com 240 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 25 AP 25.1 AP Controller The AP controller acts as a centralized controller of Pepwave Access Points. With this feature, users can customize and manage up to 1500 Access Points from a single Pepwave router interface. To configure, navigate to the AP tab. and the following screen appears. AP Controller AP Management The AP controller for managing Pepwave APs can be enabled by checking this box. When this option is enabled, the AP controller will wait for management connections originating from APs over the LAN on TCP and UDP port 11753. It will also wait for captive portal connections on TCP port 443. An extended DHCP option, CAPWAP Access Controller addresses (field 138), will be added to the DHCP server. A local DNS record, AP Controller , will be added to the local DNS proxy. Sync Method As soon as possible Progressively One at a time Permitted AP Access points to manage can be specified here. If Any is selected, the AP controller will manage any AP that reports to it. If Approved List is selected, only APs with serial numbers listed in the provided text box will be managed. 25.2 Wireless SSID Current SSID information appears in the SSID section. To edit an existing SSID, click its name in the list. To add a new SSID, click Add . Note that the following settings vary by model. The below settings ishows a new SSID window with Advanced Settings enabled (these are available by selecting the question mark in the top right corner). https://www.peplink.com 241 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SSID Settings SSID This setting specifies the SSID of the virtual AP to be scanned by Wi-Fi clients. Schedule Click the drop-down menu to apply a time schedule to this interface VLAN This setting specifies the VLAN ID to be tagged on all outgoing packets generated from this wireless network (i.e., packets that travel from the Wi-Fi segment through the Pepwave AP One unit to the Ethernet segment via the LAN port). The default value of this setting is 0 , which means VLAN tagging is disabled (instead of tagged with zero). Broadcast SSID This setting specifies whether or not Wi-Fi clients can scan the SSID of this wireless network. Broadcast SSID is enabled by default. Data Rate A Select Auto to allow the Pepwave router to set the data rate automatically, or select Fixed and choose a rate from the displayed drop-down menu. Multicast Filter A This setting enables the filtering of multicast network traffic to the wireless SSID. https://www.peplink.com 242 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Multicast Rate A This setting specifies the transmit rate to be used for sending multicast network traffic. The selected Protocol and Channel Bonding settings will affect the rate options and values available here. IGMP Snooping A To allow the Pepwave router to listen to internet group management protocol
(IGMP) network traffic, select this option. Layer 2 Isolation A Layer 2 refers to the second layer in the ISO Open System Interconnect model. When this option is enabled, clients on the same VLAN, SSID, or subnet are isolated to that VLAN, SSID, or subnet, which can enhance security. Traffic is passed to the upper communication layer(s). By default, the setting is disabled. Maximum Number of Clients A Indicate the maximum number of clients that should be able to connect to each frequency. Band Steering A To reduce 2.4 GHz band overcrowding, AP with band steering steers clients capable of 5 GHz operation to 5 GHz frequency. Choose between:
Force - Clients capable of 5 GHz operation are only offered with 5 GHz frequency. Prefer - Clients capable of 5 GHz operation are encouraged to associate with 5 GHz frequency. If the clients insist to attempt on 2.4 GHz frequency, 2.4 GHz frequency will be offered. Disable - Default A - Advanced feature. Click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Security Settings This setting configures the wireless authentication and encryption methods. Available options :
Security Policy Open ( No Encryption) Enhanced Open (OWE) WPA3 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA3 -Enterprise (AES:CCMP) WPA2/WPA3 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2 -Personal (AES:CCMP) WPA2 Enterprise WPA/WPA2 - Personal (TKIP/AES: CCMP) https://www.peplink.com 243 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WPA/WPA2 Enterprise
is Enterprise WPA/WPA2 802.1 configured, RADIUS-based When x authentication is enabled. Under this configuration, the Shared Key option should be disabled. When using this method, select the appropriate version using the V1 / V2 controls. The security level of this method is known to be very high. When WPA/WPA2- Personal is configured, a shared key is used for data encryption and authentication. When using this configuration, the Shared Key option should be enabled. Key length must be between eight and 63 characters (inclusive). The security level of this method is known to be high. NOTE:
When WPA2/WPA3- Personal is configured, if a managed AP which is NOT WPA3 PSK capable, the AP Controller will not push those WPA3 and WPA2/WPA3 SSID to that AP. Access Control Restricted Mode The settings allow the administrator to control access using MAC address filtering. Available options are None , Deny all except listed , Accept all except listed and Radius MAC Authentication. MAC Address List Connection coming from the MAC addresses in this list will be either denied or accepted based on the option selected in the previous field. If more than one MAC address needs to be entered, you can use a carriage return to separate them. https://www.peplink.com 244 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink RADIUS Settings Authentication Host Authentication Port Authentication Secret Accounting Host Accounting Port Accounting Secret This field is for specifying the IP address of the primary RADIUS server for Authentication and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. In the field, the UDP authentication port(s) used by your RADIUS server(s) or click the Default is 1812 . This settings is enter the RADIUS shared secret for the primary server and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. This field is for specifying the IP address of the primary RADIUS server for Accounting and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. In the field, enter the UDP accounting port(s) used by your RADIUS server(s) or click the Default is 1813 . This settings is enter the RADIUS shared secret for the primary server and, if applicable, the secondary RADIUS server. NAS-Identifier Choose between Device Name , LAN MAC address , Device Serial Number and Custom Value https://www.peplink.com 245 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Guest Protect Block All Private IP Check this box to deny all connection attempts by private IP addresses. Custom Subnet To create a custom subnet for guest access, enter the IP address and choose a subnet mask from the drop-down menu. Block Exception To block access from a particular subnet, enter the IP address and choose a subnet mask from the drop-down menu. Firewall Settings Firewall Mode The settings allow administrators to control access to the SSID based on Firewall Rules. Available options are Disable, Lockdown - Block all except... and Flexible
-Allow all except Firewall Exceptions Create Firewall Rules based on Port, IP Network, MAC address or Domain Name https://www.peplink.com 246 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 25.3 Wireless Mesh Wireless Mesh Support is available on devices running 802.11ac (Wi-Fi 5) and above. Along with the AP Controller, mesh network extensions can be established, which can expand network coverage. Note that the Wireless Mesh settings need to match the Mesh ID and Shared Key of the other devices on the same selected frequency band. To create a new Wireless Mesh profile, go to AP > Wireless Mesh , and click Add . Wireless Mesh Settings Mesh ID Enter a name to represent the Mesh profile. Frequency Select the 2.4GHz or 5GHz frequency to be used. Shared Key Enter the shared key in the text field. Please note that it needs to match the shared keys of the other APs in the Wireless Mesh settings. Click Hide / Show Characters to toggle visibility. https://www.peplink.com 247 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 25.4 Settings To configure the AP settings, navigating to AP > Settings :
AP Settings SSID These buttons specify which wireless networks will use this AP profile. You can also select the frequencies at which each network will transmit. Please note that the Pepwave MAX does not detect whether the AP is capable of transmitting at https://www.peplink.com 248 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Operating Country both frequencies. Instructions to transmit at unsupported frequencies will be ignored by the AP. This drop-down menu specifies the national / regional regulations which the AP should follow. If a North American region is selected, RF channels 1 to 11 will be available and the maximum transmission power will be 26 dBm (400 mW). If European region is selected, RF channels 1 to 13 will be available. The maximum transmission power will be 20 dBm (100 mW). Note: Users are required to choose an option suitable to local laws and regulations. Per FCC regulation, the country selection is not available on all models marketed in the US. All US models are fixed to US channels only. Preferred Frequency These buttons determine the frequency at which access points will attempt to broadcast. This feature will only work for APs that can transmit at both 5.4GHz and 5GHz frequencies. Protocol This option allows you to specify whether 802.11b and/or 802.11g client association requests will be accepted. Available options are 802.11ng and 802.11na . By default, 802.11ng is selected. Channel Width There are three options: 20 MHz, 20/40 MHz, and 40 MHz. With this feature enabled, the Wi-Fi system can use two channels at once. Using two channels improves the performance of the Wi-Fi connection. Channel Auto Channel Update Output Power This drop-down menu selects the 802.11 channel to be utilized. Available options are from 1 to 11 and from 1 to 13 for the North America region and Europe region, respectively. (Channel 14 is only available when the country is selected as Japan with protocol 802.11b.) If Auto is set, the system will perform channel scanning based on the scheduled time set and choose the most suitable channel automatically. Indicate the time of day at which update automatic channel selection. This drop-down menu determines the power at which the AP under this profile will broadcast. When fixed settings are selected, the AP will broadcast at the specified power level, regardless of context. When Dynamic settings are selected, the AP will adjust its power level based on its surrounding APs in order to maximize performance. The Dynamic: Auto setting will set the AP to do this automatically. Otherwise, the Dynamic: Manual setting will set the AP to dynamically adjust only if instructed to do so. If you have set Dynamic:Manual , you can go to AP>Toolbox>Auto Power Adj. to give your AP further instructions. If you click the Boost checkbox, the AP under this profile will transmit using additional power. Please note that using this option with several APs in close proximity will lead to increased interference. https://www.peplink.com 249 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Client Signal Strength Threshold This field determines that maximum signal strength each individual client will receive. The measurement unit is megawatts. Max number of Clients This field determines the maximum clients that can be connected to APs under this profile. Management VLAN ID This field specifies the VLAN ID to tag to management traffic, such as AP to AP controller communication traffic. The value is 0 by default, meaning that no VLAN tagging will be applied. Note: change this value with caution as alterations may result in loss of connection to the AP controller. Discover Nearby Networks A This option is to turn on and off to scan the nearby the AP. Note : Feature will be automatically turned on with Auto Channel / Dynamic Output Power Beacon Rate A This drop-down menu provides the option to send beacons in different transmit bit rates. The bit rates are 1Mbps , 2Mbps , 5.5Mbps , 6Mbps , and 11Mbps . Beacon Interval A This drop-down menu provides the option to set the time between each beacon send. Available options are 100ms , 250ms , and 500ms . DTIM A This field provides the option to set the frequency for beacon to include delivery traffic indication message (DTIM). The interval unit is measured in milliseconds. RTS Threshold A This field provides the option to set the minimum packet size for the unit to send an RTS using the RTS/CTS handshake. Setting 0 disables this feature. Fragmentation Threshold A Distance/Time Converter A Determines the maximum size (in bytes) that each packet fragment will be broken down into. Set 0 to disable fragmentation. Select the distance you want your Wi-Fi to cover in order to adjust the below parameters. Default values are recommended. Slot Time A This field provides the option to modify the unit wait time before it transmits. The default value is 9 s . ACK Timeout A This field provides the option to set the wait time to receive acknowledgement packet before doing retransmission. The default value is 48 s . A - Advanced feature. Click the button on the top right-hand corner to activate. Important Note Per FCC regulation, the country selection is not available on all models marketed in the US. All US models are fixed to US channels only. https://www.peplink.com 250 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The device with integrated AP can operate under the Wi-Fi Operating Mode, and the default setting is WAN + AP mode:
Note: This option is available for selected devices only (HD2/HD4 and HD2/HD4 MBX) . Integrated AP In this mode, all Wi-Fi will operate as Wi-Fi WAN and no integrated Wi-Fi AP will be operated on this device. WAN If Wi-Fi Operating mode is choosing WAN , The status indicated by the front panel LED is as follows:
Wi-Fi 1 is Green if Wi-Fi WAN 1 is enabled. Wi-Fi 2 is Green if Wi-Fi WAN 2 is enabled. In this mode, some Wi-Fi will operate as Wi-Fi WAN. Some other Wi-Fi WANs will be forced offline and their Wi-Fi resources will be reserved for integrated Wi-Fi AP operations. WAN + AP If Wi-Fi Operating mode is choosing WAN + AP , The status indicated by the front panel LED is as follows:
Wi-Fi 1 is Green if WI-FI WAN is enabled. Wi-Fi 2 is Green if Wi-Fi AP is ON. In this mode, all Wi-Fi functions as integrated Wi-Fi AP. All Wi-Fi WANs will be forced to go offline. AP If Wi-Fi Operating mode is choosing AP , The status indicated by the front panel LED is as follows:
W-Fi 1 is Green, if there is any Wireless SSID is selected 2.4GHz. W-Fi 2 is Green, if there is any Wireless SSID is selected 5GHz. https://www.peplink.com 251 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Web Administration Settings (on External AP) Enable Check the box to allow the Pepwave router to manage the web admin access information of the AP. Web Access Protocol These buttons specify the web access protocol used for accessing the web admin of the AP. The two available options are HTTP and HTTPS . Management Port This field specifies the management port used for accessing the device. HTTP to HTTPS Redirection This option will be available if you have chosen HTTPS as the Web Access Protocol . With this enabled, any HTTP access to the web admin will redirect to HTTPS automatically. Admin User Name This field specifies the administrator username of the web admin. It is set as admin by default. Admin Password This field allows you to specify a new administrator password. You may also click the Generate button and let the system generate a random password automatically. This allows users to configure AP Time Settings (both Timezone and NTP) in AP Controller. AP Time Settings Time Zone This field is to select the time zone for the AP controller. Time Server This field is to select the time server for the AP controller. This settings is to allow user to manage external AP's controller unreachable action. When Manage Unreachable Action is checked, there will have 2 options which are " None " and
" Radio Off ". https://www.peplink.com 252 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This is an option to enable client load balancing for AP Controller. When the option is enabled, it is trying to balance the station count on APs within the same profile. Some Pepwave models displays a screen similar to the one shown below, navigating to AP >
Settings :
Wi-Fi Radio Settings Operating Country This option sets the country whose regulations the Pepwave router follows. Wi-Fi Antenna Wi-Fi Antenna Choose from the router's internal or optional external antennas, if so equipped. Wi-Fi AP Settings Protocol This option allows you to specify whether 802.11b and/or 802.11g client association requests will be accepted. Available options are 802.11ng and 802.11na . By default, 802.11ng is selected. https://www.peplink.com 253 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Channel This option allows you to select which 802.11 RF channel will be used. Channel 1 (2.412 GHz) is selected by default. Channel Width Auto (20/40 MHz) and 20 MH z are available. The default setting is Auto (20/40 MHz) , which allows both widths to be used simultaneously. Output Power This option is for specifying the transmission output power for the Wi-Fi AP. There are 4 relative power levels available Max , High , Mid , and Low . The actual output power will be bound by the regulatory limits of the selected country. Beacon Rate A This option is for setting the transmit bit rate for sending a beacon. By default, 1Mbps is selected. Beacon Interval A This option is for setting the time interval between each beacon. By default, 100ms is selected. DITM A This field allows you to set the frequency for the beacon to include a delivery traffic indication message. The interval is measured in milliseconds. The default value is set to 1 ms . Slot Time A This field is for specifying the wait time before the Router transmits a packet. By default, this field is set to 9 s . ACK Time A This field is for setting the wait time to receive an acknowledgement packet before performing a retransmission. By default, this field is set to 48 s . Frame Aggreagtion A This option allows you to enable frame aggregation to increase transmission throughput. Guard Interval A This setting allows choosing a short or long guard period interval for your transmissions. https://www.peplink.com 254 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 26 AP Controller Status 26.1 Info A comprehensive overview of your AP can be accessed by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Info . AP Controller License Limit This field displays the maximum number of AP your Balance router can control. You can purchase licenses to increase the number of AP you can manage. Frequency Underneath, there are two check boxes labeled 2.4 Ghz and 5 Ghz . Clicking either box will toggle the display of information for that frequency. By default, the graphs display the number of clients and data usage for both 2.4GHz and 5 GHz frequencies. SSID The colored boxes indicate the SSID to display information for. Clicking any colored box will toggle the display of information for that SSID. By default, all the graphs show information for all SSIDs. No. of APs This pie chart and table indicates how many APs are online and how many are offline. No.of Clients This graph displays the number of clients connected to each network at any https://www.peplink.com 255 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink given time. Mouse over any line on the graph to see how many clients connected to a specific SSID for that point in time. This graph enables you to see the data usage of any SSID for any given time period. Mouse over any line on the graph to see the data usage by each SSID for that point in time. Use the buttons next to Zoom to select the time scale you wish to view. In addition, you could use the sliders at the bottom to further refine your timescale. Data Usage This event log displays all activity on your AP network, down to the client level. Click View Alerts to see only alerts, and click the More link for additional records. Events This allow user to configure AP Time Settings (both Timezone and NTP) in AP Controller. AP Time Settings Time Zone Ths field is to select the time zone for the AP controller. Time Server Ths field is to select the time server for the AP controller. https://www.peplink.com 256 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This settings is to allow user to manage external AP's controller unreachable action. When Manage Unreachable Action is checked, there will have 2 options which are " None " and
" Radio Off ". This is an option to enable client load balancing for AP Controller. When the option is enabled, it is trying to balance the station count on APs within the same profile. 26.2 Access Point A detailed breakdown of data usage for each AP is available at AP > Controller Status >
Access Point . Managed APs This table shows the detailed information on each AP, including channel, number of clients, upload traffic, and download traffic. Click the blue arrows at the left of the table to expand and collapse information on each device group. Managed APs On the right of the table, you will see the following icons:
. Click the icon to see a usage table for each client:
https://www.peplink.com 257 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click the icon to configure each client For easier network management, you can give each client a name and designate its location. You can also designate which firmware pack (if any) this client will follow, as well as the channels on which the client will broadcast. Click the icon to see a graph displaying usage:
https://www.peplink.com 258 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click any point in the graphs to display detailed usage and client information for that device, using that SSID, at that point in time. On the Data Usage by menu, you can display the information by SSID or by AP send/receive rate. Click the Event tab next to Wireless Usage to view a detailed event log for that particular device:
https://www.peplink.com 259 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 26.3 Wireless SSID In-depth SSID reports are available under AP > Controller Status > Wireless SSID . Click the blue arrow on any SSID to obtain more detailed usage information on each SSID. https://www.peplink.com 260 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 26.4 Wireless Client You can search for specific Wi-Fi users by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Wireless Client . Here, you will be able to see your networks heaviest users as well as search for specific users. Click the icon for additional details about each user:
icon to bookmark specific users, and click the https://www.peplink.com 261 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 26.5 Mesh / WDS Mesh / WDS allows you to monitor the status of your wireless distribution system (WDS) or Mesh, and track activity by MAC address by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Mesh /
WDS . This table shows the detailed information of each AP, including protocol, transmit rate
(sent / received), signal strength, and duration. https://www.peplink.com 262 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 26.6 Nearby Device A listing of near devices can be accessed by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Nearby Device . Suspected Rogue Devices Hovering over the device MAC address will result in a popup with information on how this device was detected. Click the icons and the device will be moved to the bottom table of identified devices. 26.7 Event Log You can access the AP Controller Event log by navigating to AP > Controller Status > Event Log . https://www.peplink.com 263 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This event log displays all activity on your AP network, down to the client level. Use to filter box to search by MAC address, SSID, AP Serial Number, or AP Profile name. Click View Alerts to see only alerts, and click the More link for additional records. Events 27 Toolbox Tools for managing firmware packs can be found at AP > Toolbox . Firmware Packs Here, you can manage the firmware of your AP. Clicking on will result in information regarding each firmware pack. To receive new firmware packs, you can click Check for Updates to download new packs, or you can click Manual Upload to manually upload a firmware pack. Click Default to define which firmware pack is default. https://www.peplink.com 264 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 28 System 28.1 Admin Security There are two types of user accounts available for accessing the web admin: admin and user . They represent two user levels: the admin level has full administrative access, while the user level is read-only. The user level can access only the device's status information; users cannot make any changes on the device. A web login session will be logged out automatically when it has been idle longer than the Web Session Timeout . Before the session expires, you may click the Logout button in the web admin to exit the session. 0 hours 0 minutes signifies an unlimited session time. This setting should be used only in special situations, as it will lower the system security level if users do not log out before closing the browser. The default is 4 hours, 0 minutes. For security reasons, after logging in to the web admin Interface for the first time, it is recommended to change the administrator password. Configuring the administration interface to be accessible only from the LAN can further improve system security. Administrative settings configuration is located at System > Admin Security . https://www.peplink.com 265 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Admin Settings Device Name This field allows you to define a name for this Pepwave router. By default, Device Name is set as MAX_XXXX , where XXXX refers to the last 4 digits of https://www.peplink.com 266 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink the units serial number. Admin User Name Admin User Name is set as admin by default, but can be changed, if desired. Admin Password This field allows you to specify a new administrator password. Confirm Admin Password Read-only User Name Read-only Password Confirm Read-only Password This field allows you to verify and confirm the new administrator password. Read-only User Name is set as user by default, but can be changed, if desired. This field allows you to specify a new user password. Once the user password is set, the read-only user feature will be enabled. This field allows you to verify and confirm the new user password. Web Session Timeout This field specifies the number of hours and minutes that a web session can remain idle before the Pepwave router terminates its access to the web admin interface. By default, it is set to 4 hours . With this box is checked, the web admin will authenticate using an external RADIUS server. Authenticated users are treated as either "admin" with full read-write permission or user with read-only access. Local admin and user accounts will be disabled. When the device is not able to communicate with the external RADIUS server, local accounts will be enabled again for emergency access. Additional authentication options will be available once this box is checked. Available options:
Local Account RADIUS Authentication Method Authentication This specifies the authentication protocol used. https://www.peplink.com 267 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Protocol Available options are MS-CHAP v2 and PAP . Authentication Host This specifies the IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server host. Authentication Port This setting specifies the UDP destination port for authentication requests. Authentication Secret This field is for entering the secret key for accessing the RADIUS server. Accounting Host This specifies the IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server host. Accounting Port This setting specifies the UDP destination port for accounting requests. Accounting Secret This field is for entering the secret key for accessing the accounting server. Authentication Timeout This option specifies the time value for authentication timeout TACACS+
TACACS+ Server This specifies the access address of the external TACACS+ server. TACACS+ Server Secret This field is for entering the secret key for accessing the RADIUS server. TACACS+ Server Timeout This option specifies the time value for TACACS+
timeout CLI SSH &
Console The CLI (command line interface) can be accessed via SSH. This field enables CLI support. For additional information regarding CLI, please refer to Section 30.5. CLI SSH Access This menu allows you to choose between granting access to LAN and WAN clients, or to LAN clients only. https://www.peplink.com 268 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CLI SSH Port This field determines the port on which clients can access CLI SSH. CLI SSH Access Public Key This field is for entering the Public Key for Admin Users and Read-only Users to access CLI SSH. This option is for specifying the protocol(s) through which the web admin interface can be accessed:
Security HTTP HTTPS HTTP/HTTPS HTTP to HTTPS redirection is enabled by default to force HTTPS access to the web admin interface. This option is for specifying the network interfaces through which the web admin interface can be accessed:
Web Admin Access LAN only LAN/WAN If LAN/WAN is chosen, the WAN Connection Access Settings form will be displayed. Web Admin Port This field is for specifying the port number on which the web admin interface can be accessed. Allowed Source IP Subnets WAN Connection Access Settings This field allows you to restrict web admin access only from defined IP subnets. Any - Allow web admin accesses to be from anywhere, without IP address restriction. Allow access from the following IP subnets only - Restrict web admin access only from the defined IP subnets. When this is chosen, a text input area will be displayed beneath:
https://www.peplink.com 269 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The allowed IP subnet addresses should be entered into this text area. Each IP subnet must be in form of w.x.y.z/m , where w.x.y.z is an IP address (e.g., 192.168.0.0 ), and m is the subnet mask in CIDR format, which is between 0 and 32 inclusively (For example, 192.168.0.0/24 ). To define multiple subnets, separate each IP subnet one in a line. For example:
192.168.0.0/24 10.8.0.0/16 Allowed WAN IP Address(es) This is to choose which WAN IP address(es) the web server should listen on. 28.2 Firmware Web admin interface : automatically check for updates Upgrading firmware can be done in one of three ways. Using the routers interface to automatically check for an update, using the routers interface to manually upgrade the firmware, or using InControl2 to push an upgrade to a router. The automatic upgrade can be done from System > Firmware . If an update is found the buttons will change to allow you to Download and Update the firmware. Click on the Download and Upgrade button. A prompt will be displayed advising to download the Current Active Configuration. Please click on the underlined download text. After downloading the current config click the Ok button to start the upgrade process. The router will download and then apply the firmware. The time that this process takes will depend on your internet connections speed. https://www.peplink.com 270 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The firmware will now be applied to the router*. The amount of time it takes for the firmware to upgrade will also depend on the router thats being upgraded.
*Upgrading the firmware will cause the router to reboot. Web admin interface : install updates manually In some cases, a special build may be provided via a ticket or it may be found in the forum. Upgrading to the special build can be done using this method, or using IC2 if you are using that to manage your firmware upgrades. A manual upgrade using the GA firmware posted on the site may also be recommended or required for a couple of reasons. All of the Peplink/Pepwave GA firmware can be found here Navigate to the relevant product line
(ie. Balance, Max, FusionHub, SOHO, etc). Some product lines may have a dropdown that lists all of the products in that product line. Here is a screenshot from the Balance line. If the device has more than one firmware version the current hardware revision will be required to know what firmware to download. Navigate to System > Firmware and click the Choose File button under the Manual Firmware Upgrade section. Navigate to the location that the firmware was downloaded to select the .img file and click the Open button. Click on the Manual Upgrade button to start the upgrade process. https://www.peplink.com 271 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink A prompt will be displayed advising to download the Current Active Configuration. Please click on the underlined download text. After downloading the current config click the Ok button to start the upgrade process. The firmware will now be applied to the router*. The amount of time it takes for the firmware to upgrade will depend on the router thats being upgraded.
*Upgrading the firmware will cause the router to reboot. The InControl method Described in this knowledgebase article on our forum. 28.3 Time Time Settings enables the system clock of the Pepwave router to be synchronized with a specified time server. Time settings are located at System > Time . Time Settings Time Zone This specifies the time zone (along with the corresponding Daylight Savings Time scheme). The Time Zone value affects the time stamps in the Pepwave routers event log and e-mail notifications. Check Show all to show all time zone options. https://www.peplink.com 272 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This field allows to select your time sync mode, the available options are:
Time Sync Time Server GPS GPS with Time Server as fallback Time Server This setting specifies the NTP network time server to be utilized by the Pepwave router. 28.4 Schedule Enable and disable different functions (such as WAN connections, outbound policy, and firewalls at different times, based on a user-scheduled configuration profile. The settings for this are located at System > Schedule Enable scheduling, and then click on your schedule name or on the New Schedule button to begin. https://www.peplink.com 273 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Edit Schedule Profile Enabling Click this checkbox to enable this schedule profile. Note that if this is disabled, then any associated features will also have their scheduling disabled. Name Enter your desired name for this particular schedule profile. Schedule Click the drop-down menu to choose pre-defined schedules as your starting point. Please note that upon selection, previous changes on the schedule map will be deleted. Schedule Map Click on the desired times to enable features at that time period. You can hold your mouse for faster entry. 28.5 Email Notication Email notification functionality provides a system administrator with up-to-date information on network status. The settings for configuring email notifications are found at System>Email Notification . Email Notification Settings Email Notification This setting specifies whether or not to enable email notification. If Enable is checked, the Pepwave router will send email messages to system administrators when the WAN status changes or when new firmware is available. If Enable is not checked, email notification is disabled and the Pepwave router will not send email messages. https://www.peplink.com 274 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink SMTP Server This setting specifies the SMTP server to be used for sending email. If the server requires authentication, check Require authentication . Connection Security This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid Connection Security:
None STARTTLS SSL/TLS SMTP Port SMTP User Name /
Password Confirm SMTP Password Senders Email Address This field is for specifying the SMTP port number. By default, this is set to 25 . If Connection Security is selected STARTTLS , the default port number will be set to 587 . If Connection Security is selected SSL/TLS , the default port number will be set to 465 . You may customize the port number by editing this field. This setting specifies the SMTP username and password while sending email. These options are shown only if Require authentication is checked in the SMTP Server setting. This field allows you to verify and confirm the new administrator password. This setting specifies the email address the Pepwave router will use to send reports. Recipients Email Address This setting specifies the email address(es) to which the Pepwave router will send email notifications. For multiple recipients, separate each email addresses using the enter key. After you have finished setting up email notifications, you can click the Test Email Notification button to test the settings before saving. After Test Email Notification is clicked, you will see this screen to confirm the settings:
Click Send Test Notification to confirm. In a few seconds, you will see a message with detailed test results. https://www.peplink.com 275 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 276 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 28.6 Event Log Event log functionality enables event logging at a specified remote syslog server. The settings for configuring the remote system log can be found at System > Event Log . Event Log Settings Remote Syslog This setting specifies whether or not to log events at the specified remote syslog server. Remote Syslog Host This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the remote syslog server. Source Network Address Via drop-down list, you may choose the LAN interface for Event Log, URL Logging, Sessions Logging and RADIUS. Push Events The Pepwave router can also send push notifications to mobile devices that have our Mobile Router Utility installed. Check the box to activate this feature. URL Logging This setting is to enable event logging at the specified log server. URL Logging Host This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the URL log server. https://www.peplink.com 277 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Session Logging This setting is to enable event logging at the specified log server. Session Logging Host This setting specifies the IP address or hostname of the Session log server. For www.peplink.com/products/router-utility information more on the Router Utility, go to:
28.7 SNMP SNMP or simple network management protocol is an open standard that can be used to collect information about the Pepwave router. SNMP configuration is located at System > SNMP . SNMP Device This field shows the router name defined at System > Admin Security . SNMP Settings https://www.peplink.com 278 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Name SNMP Port This option specifies the port which SNMP will use. The default port is 161 . SNMPv1 SNMPv2 SNMPv3 SNMP Trap SNMP Trap Community SNMP Trap Server This option allows you to enable SNMP version 1. This option allows you to enable SNMP version 2. This option allows you to enable SNMP version 3. This option allows you to enable SNMP Trap. If enabled, the following entry fields will appear. This setting specifies the SNMP Trap community name. Enter the IP address of the SNMP Trap server. SNMP Trap Port This option specifies the port which the SNMP Trap server will use. The default port is 162 . SNMP Trap Server Heartbeat This option allows you to enable and configure the heartbeat interval for the SNMP Trap server. To add a community for either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2, click the Add SNMP Community button in the Community Name table, upon which the following screen is displayed:
SNMP Community Settings Community Name This setting specifies the SNMP community name. Allowed Source Subnet Address This setting specifies a subnet from which access to the SNMP server is allowed. Enter subnet address here (e.g., 192.168.1.0 ) and select the appropriate subnet mask. https://www.peplink.com 279 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink To define a user name for SNMPv3, click Add SNMP User in the SNMPv3 User Name table, upon which the following screen is displayed:
User Name This setting specifies a user name to be used in SNMPv3. SNMPv3 User Settings This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid authentication protocols:
Authentication Protocol NONE MD5 SHA When MD5 or SHA is selected, an entry field will appear for the password. This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid privacy protocols:
Privacy Protocol NONE DES When DES is selected, an entry field will appear for the password. 28.8 SMS Control SMS Control allows the user to control the device using SMS even if the modem does not have a data connection. The settings for configuring the SMS Control can be found at System > SMS Control . Supported Models Balance/MAX : *-LTE-E, *-LTEA-W, *-LTEA-P, *-LTE-MX EPX : *-LW*, *-LP*
https://www.peplink.com 280 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When this box is checked, the device will be allowed to take actions according to received commands via SMS. Make sure your mobile plan supports SMS, and note that some plans may incur additional charges for this. SMS Control can reboot devices and configure cellular settings over signalling channels, even if the modem does not have a data connection. For details of supported SMS command sets, please refer to our knowledge base . Enable Click the checkbox to enable the SMS Control. SMS Control Settings Password This setting sets the password for authentication - maximum of 32 characters, which cannot include semicolon (;). White List Optionally, you can add phone number(s) to the whitelist. Only matching phone numbers are allowed to issue SMS commands. Phone numbers must be in the E.164 International Phone Numbers format. 28.9 InControl InControl is a cloud-based service which allows you to manage all of your Peplink and Pepwave devices with one unified system. With it, you can generate reports, gather statistics, and https://www.peplink.com 281 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink configure your devices automatically. All of this is now possible with InControl. When this check box is checked, the device's status information will be sent to the Peplink InControl system. This device's usage data and configuration will be sent to the system if you enable the features in the system. Alternatively, you can also privately host InControl. Simply check the Privately Host InControl box and enter the IP Address of your InControl Host. If you have multiple hosts, you may enter the primary and backup IP addresses for the InControl Host and tick the Fail over to InControl in the cloud box. The device will connect to either the primary InControl Host or the secondary/backup ICA/IC2. You can sign up for an InControl account at https://incontrol2.peplink.com/. You can register your devices under the account, monitor their status, see their usage reports, and receive offline notifications. 28.10 Conguration Backing up Pepwave router settings immediately after successful completion of initial setup is strongly recommended. The functionality to download and upload Pepwave router settings is found at System > Configuration . Note that available options vary by model. Restore Configuration to The Restore Factory Settings button is to reset the configuration to factory default settings. After clicking the button, you will need to click the Apply Configuration https://www.peplink.com 282 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Factory Settings Changes button on the top right corner to make the settings effective. Download Active Configurations Upload Configurations Click Download to backup the current active settings. To restore or change settings based on a configuration file, click Choose File to locate the configuration file on the local computer, and then click Upload . The new settings can then be applied by clicking the Apply Changes button on the page header, or you can cancel the procedure by pressing discard on the main page of the web admin interface. Upload Configurations from High Availability Pair In a high availability (HA) configuration, a Pepwave router can quickly load the configuration of its HA counterpart. To do so, click the Upload button. After loading the settings, configure the LAN IP address of the Pepwave router so that it is different from the HA counterpart. 28.11 Feature Add-ons Some Pepwave routers have features that can be activated upon purchase. Once the purchase is complete, you will receive an activation key. Enter the key in the Activation Key field, click Activate , and then click Apply Changes . 28.12 Reboot This page provides a reboot button for restarting the system. For maximum reliability, the Pepwave router can equip with two copies of firmware. Each copy can be a different version. You can select the firmware version you would like to reboot the device with. The firmware marked with (Running) is the current system boot up firmware. Please note that a firmware upgrade will always replace the inactive firmware partition . https://www.peplink.com 283 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 29 Tools 29.1 Ping The ping test tool sends pings through a specific Ethernet interface or a SpeedFusion TM VPN connection. You can specify the number of pings in the field Number of times , to a maximum number of 10 times. Packet Size can be set to a maximum of 1472 bytes. The ping utility is located at System > Tools > Ping , illustrated below:
A system administrator can use the ping utility to manually check the connectivity of a particular LAN/WAN connection. Tip https://www.peplink.com 284 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 29.2 Traceroute Test The traceroute test tool traces the routing path to the destination through a particular Ethernet interface or a SpeedFusion TM connection. The traceroute test utility is located at System > Tools
> Traceroute . A system administrator can use the traceroute utility to analyze the connection path of a LAN/WAN connection. Tip 29.3 Wake-on-LAN Pepwane routers can send special magic packets to any client specified from the Web UI. To access this feature, navigate to System > Tools > Wake-on-LAN Select a client from the drop-down list and click Send to send a magic packet https://www.peplink.com 285 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 29.4 WAN Analysis The WAN Analysis feature allows you to run a WAN to WAN speed test between 2 Peplink devices . You can set a device up as a Server or a Client . One device must be set up as a server to run the speed tests and the server must have a public IP address. The default port is 6000 and can be changed if required. The IP address of the WAN interface will be shown in the WAN Connection Status section. https://www.peplink.com 286 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The client side has a few more settings that can be changed. Make sure that the Control Port matches whats been entered on the server side. Select the WAN(s) that will be used for testing and enter the Servers WAN IP address. Once all of the options have been set, click the Start Test button. https://www.peplink.com 287 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink The test output will show the Data Streams Parameters , the Throughput as a graph, and the Results . The test can be run again once its complete by clicking the Start button or you can click Close and change the parameters for the test. https://www.peplink.com 288 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 29.5 CLI (Command Line Interface Support) The CLI (command line interface) can be accessed via SSH. This field enables CLI support. The below settings specify which TCP port and which interface(s) should accept remote SSH CLI access. The user name and password used for remote SSH CLI access are the same as those used for web admin access. https://www.peplink.com 289 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 30 Status 30.1 Device System information is located at Status > Device . System Information Device Name This is the name specified in the Device Name field located at System > Admin Security . Model This shows the model name and number of this device. Product Code If your model uses a product code, it will appear here. Hardware Revision This shows the hardware version of this device. https://www.peplink.com 290 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Serial Number This shows the serial number of this device. Firmware This shows the firmware version this device is currently running. SpeedFusion VPN Version This shows the current SpeedFusion VPN version. Modem Support Version This shows the modem support version. For a list of supported modems, click Modem Support List . InControl Managed Configuration InControl Managed Configurations (firmware, VLAN, Captive Portal, etcetera) Host Name The host name assigned to the Pepwave router appears here. Uptime This shows the length of time since the device has been rebooted. System Time This shows the current system time. OpenVPN Client Profile Link to download OpenVpn Client profile when this is enabled in Remote User Access Diagnostic Report Remote Assistance The Download link is for exporting a diagnostic report file required for system investigation. This option is to Turn on remote assistance with the time duration. The second table shows the MAC address of each LAN/WAN interface connected. To view your devices End User License Agreement (EULA), click Legal . https://www.peplink.com 291 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 30.2 GPS Data GPS enabled models automatically store up to seven days of GPS location data in GPS eXchange format (GPX). To review this data using third-party applications, click Status >
Device and then download your GPX file. The Pepwave GPS enabled devices export real-time location data in NMEA format through the LAN IP address at TCP port 60660. It is accessible from the LAN or over a SpeedFusion connection. To access the data via a virtual serial port, install a virtual serial port driver. Visit http://www.peplink.com/index.php?view=faq&id=294 to download the driver. https://www.peplink.com 292 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 30.3 Active Sessions Information on active sessions can be found at Status > Active Sessions > Overview . This screen displays the number of sessions initiated by each application. Click on each service listing for additional information. This screen also indicates the number of sessions initiated by each WAN port. In addition, you can see which clients are initiating the most sessions. You can also perform a filtered search for specific sessions. You can filter by subnet, port, protocol, and interface. To perform a search, navigate to Status > Active Sessions > Search . https://www.peplink.com 293 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This Active Sessions section displays the active inbound/outbound sessions of each WAN connection on the Pepwave router. A filter is available to sort active session information. Enter a keyword in the field or check one of the WAN connection boxes for filtering. https://www.peplink.com 294 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 30.4 Client List The client list table is located at Status > Client List . It lists DHCP and online client IP addresses , names (retrieved from the DHCP reservation table or defined by users), current download and upload rate, and MAC address. Clients can be imported into the DHCP reservation table by clicking the right. You can update the record after import by going to Network > LAN . button on the If the PPTP server (see Section 19.2 ), SpeedFusion TM (see Section 12.1 ), or AP controller (see Section 20 ) is enabled, you may see the corresponding connection name listed in the Name field. In the client list table, there is a Ban Client feature which is used to disconnect the Wi-Fi and Remote User Access clients by clicking the button on the right. There is a blocklist on the same page after you banned the Wi-Fi or Remote User Access clients. https://www.peplink.com 295 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink You may also unblock the Wi-Fi or Remote User Access clients when the client devices need to reconnect the network by clicking the button on the right. 30.5 UPnP / NAT-PMP The table that shows the forwarded ports under UPnP and NAT-PMP protocols is located at Status > UPnP/NAT-PMP . This section appears only if you have enabled UPnP / NAT-PMP as mentioned in Section 16.1.1 . Click records, click Delete All on the right-hand side below the table. to delete a single UPnP / NAT-PMP record in its corresponding row. To delete all Important Note UPnP / NAT-PMP records will be deleted immediately after clicking the button need to click Save or Confirm . or Delete All, without the https://www.peplink.com 296 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 30.6 OSPF & RIPv2 The table shows status of OSPF and RIPv2. 30.7 BGP The table shows status of BGP 30.8 SpeedFusion VPN Current SpeedFusion VPN status information is located at Status > SpeedFusion VPN . Details about SpeedFusion VPN connection peers appears as below:
https://www.peplink.com 297 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Click on the corresponding peer name to explore the WAN connection(s) status and subnet information of each VPN peer. Click the and drop-rate information for each WAN connection. button for a SpeedFusion chart displaying real-time throughput, latency, https://www.peplink.com 298 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink When pressing the button, the following menu will appear:
The connection information shows the details of the selected SpeedFusion VPN profile, consisting of the Profile name, Router ID , Router Nam e and Serial Number of the remote router Advanced features for the SpeedFusion VPN profile will also be shown when the More Information checkbox is selected. The WAN statistics show information about the local and remote WAN connections (when show Remote connections ) is selected. The available details are WAN Name, IP address and port used for the Speedfusion connection. Rx and Tx rates, Loss rate and Latency . Connections can be temporarily disabled by sliding the switch button next to a WAN connection to the left. The wan-to-wan connection disabled by the switch is temporary and will be re-enabled after 15 https://www.peplink.com 299 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink minutes without any action. This can be used when testing the SpeedFusion VPNs speed between two locations to see if there is interference or network congestion between certain WAN connections. The SpeedFusion VPN test configuration allows us to configure and perform thorough tests. This is usually done after the initial installation of the routers and in case there are problems with aggregation. Press the Start button to perform throughput test according to the configured options. If TCP is selected, 4 parallel streams will be generated to get the optimal results by default. This can be customized by selecting a different value of streams. Using more streams will typically get better results if the latency of the tunnel is high. https://www.peplink.com 300 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Peplink also published a whitepaper about Speedfusion which can be downloaded from the following url:
http://download.peplink.com/resources/whitepaper-speedfusion-and-best-practices-2019.pdf https://www.peplink.com 301 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 30.9 Event Log Event log information is located at Status > Event Log . 30.9.1 Device Event Log The log section displays a list of events that has taken place on the Pepwave router. Click the to refresh log entries automatically. Click the button to clear the log. https://www.peplink.com 302 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 30.9.2 Firewall Event log This section displays a list of events that have taken place within a firewall. Click the button and the log will be refreshed. 30.9.3 SpeedFusion VPN Event log This section displays a list of events that have taken place within a SpeedFusion VPN connection. Click the button and the log will be refreshed. https://www.peplink.com 303 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 31 WAN Quality The Status > WAN Quality allow to show detailed information about each connected WAN connection. For cellular connections it shows signal strength, quality, throughput and latency for the past hour. https://www.peplink.com 304 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 32 Usage Reports This section shows bandwidth usage statistics and is located at Status > Usage Reports Bandwidth usage at the LAN while the device is switched off (e.g., LAN bypass) is neither recorded nor shown. 32.1 Real-Time The Data transferred since installation table indicates how much network traffic has been processed by the device since the first bootup. The Data transferred since last reboot table indicates how much network traffic has been processed by the device since the last bootup. https://www.peplink.com 305 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 32.2 Hourly This page shows the hourly bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of viewing each individual connection. Select the desired connection to check from the drop-down menu. https://www.peplink.com 306 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 32.3 Daily This page shows the daily bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of viewing each individual connection. Select the connection to check from the drop-down menu. If you have enabled the Bandwidth Monitoring feature , the Current Billing Cycle table for that WAN connection will be displayed. Click on a date to view the client bandwidth usage of that specific date. This feature is not available if you have selected to view the bandwidth usage of only a particular WAN connection. The scale of the graph can be set to display megabytes ( MB ) or gigabytes ( GB ). All WAN Daily Bandwidth Usage https://www.peplink.com 307 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 32.4 Monthly This page shows the monthly bandwidth usage for each WAN connection. If you have enabled the Bandwidth Monitoring feature, you can check the usage of each particular connection and view the information by Billing Cycle or by Calendar Month . Click the first two rows to view the client bandwidth usage in the last two months. This feature is not available if you have chosen to view the bandwidth of an individual WAN connection. The scale of the graph can be set to display megabytes ( MB ) or gigabytes ( GB ). All WAN Monthly Bandwidth Usage https://www.peplink.com 308 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Ethernet WAN Monthly Bandwidth Usage Tip By default, the scale of data size is in MB . 1GB equals 1024MB. https://www.peplink.com 309 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix A: Restoration of Factory Defaults To restore the factory default settings on a Pepwave router, follow the steps below:
1. 2. Locate the reset button on the front or back panel of the Pepwave router. With a paperclip, press and keep the reset button pressed. Hold for approximately 10 seconds for factory reset (Note: The LED status light shows in RED, until the status light off and release the button) After the Pepwave router finishes rebooting, the factory default settings will be restored. Important Note All previous configurations and bandwidth usage data will be lost after restoring factory default settings. Regular backup of configuration settings is strongly recommended. https://www.peplink.com 310 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix B: FusionSIM Manual Peplink has developed a unique technology called FusionSIM, which allows SIM cards to remotely link to a cellular router. This can be done via cloud or within the same physical network. There are a few key scenarios to fit certain applications. The purpose of this manual is to provide an introduction on where to start and how to set up for the most common scenarios and uses. Requirements 1. A Cellular router that supports FusionSIM technology 2. SIM Injector 3. SIM card Notes:
Always check for the latest Firmware version for both the cellular router and the SIM Injector. You can also check for the latest Firmware version on the devices WEB configuration page. A list of products that support FusionSIM can be found on the SIM Injector WEB page . Please check under the section Supported models . SIM Injector reset and login details How to reset a SIM Injector:
Hold the reset button for 5-10 seconds. Once the LED status light turns RED, the reset button can be released. SIM Injector will reboot and start with the factory default settings. The default WEB login settings:
User : admin Password : admin IP address: the device only has a DHCP client and no fallback IP address. Therefore, it is advised to check every time what IP address is assigned to the SIM Injector. Notes:
The SIM Injector can be monitored via InControl 2. Configuration is not supported. https://www.peplink.com 311 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 1: SIM Injector in LAN of Cellular Router Setup topology This is the most basic scenario in which the SIM Injector is connected directly to the cellular routers LAN port via an ethernet cable. This allows for the cellular router to be positioned for the best possible signal. Meanwhile, the SIM cards can be conveniently located in other locations such as the office, passenger area, or the bridge of a ship. The SIM Injector allows for easily swapping SIM cards without needing to access a cellular router. IMPORTANT: Cellular WAN will not fallback to the local SIM if it is configured to use the SIM Injector. Configuring the SIM Injector 1. Connect the SIM Injector to the LAN port of the cellular router. 2. Insert SIM cards into the SIM Injector. The SIM cards will be automatically detected. IMPORTANT: SIM cards inserted into SIM Injector must not have a PIN code. Note 1: The SIM Injector gets its IP address via DHCP and doesn't have a static IP address. To find its address, please check the DHCP lease on the cellular router. https://www.peplink.com 312 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Configuring the Cellular Router Step 1. Enable the SIM Injector communication protocol. 1a. If you are using a Balance cellular router, go to the Network tab (top navigation bar). 1b. If you are using a MAX cellular router, go to the Advanced tab (top navigation bar). 2. Under Misc. settings (left navigation bar) find Remote SIM Management . 3. In Remote SIM Management , click on the edit icon next to Remote SIM is Disabled . 4. Check the Auto LAN discovery checkbox and click Save and Apply Changes . 5. Click Save and then Apply Changes . Step 2. Enable RemoteSIM for the selected Cellular interface. 1. Go to Network (top navigation bar), then WAN (left navigation bar) and click Details for a selected cellular WAN. This will open the WAN Connection Settings page. 2. Scroll down to Cellular settings . 3. In the SIM Card section, select Use Remote SIM Only . https://www.peplink.com 313 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 4. Enter configuration settings in Remote SIM Settings section. Click on Scan nearby remote SIM server to show the serial number(s) of the connected SIM Injector(s). Available configuration options for cellular interface are shown below:
A. Defining SIM Injector(s)
- Format: <S/N>
- Example 1: 1111-2222-3333
- Example 2: 1111-2222-3333 4444-5555-6666 B. Defining SIM Injector(s) SIM slot(s):
- Format: <S/N:slot number>
- Example 1: 1111-2222-3333:7,5 (the Cellular Interface will use SIM in slot 7, then 5)
- Example 2: 1111-2222-3333:1,2 1111-2222-3333:3,4 (the cellular Interface will use SIM in slot 1, then in 2 from the first SIM Injector, and then it will use 3 and 4 from the second SIM Injector). Note: It is recommended to use different SIM slots for each cellular interface. 5. Click Save and Apply Changes . Step 3. (Optional) Custom SIM cards settings. 1a. For a Balance router, go to the Network (Top tab). https://www.peplink.com 314 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 1b. For a MAX router, go to the Advanced (Top tab). 2. Under Misc. settings (Left-side tab) find Remote SIM Management . 3. Click on the Add Remote SIM button, fill in all the required info and click Save . This section allows defining custom requirements for a SIM card located in a certain SIM slot:
Enable/Disable roaming (by default roaming is disabled). Add Custom mobile operator settings (APN, user name, password). 4. Repeat configuration for all SIM cards which need custom settings. 5. Click Apply Changes to take effect. Scenario 2: SIM Injector in WAN of main Router and multiple Cellular Routers Setup topology In this scenario, each HD Dome creates a WAN connection to the main router. A single SIM Injector is used to provide SIM cards for each HD Dome. The HD Dome can be replaced with any Peplink cellular router supporting RemoteSIM technology. This scenario requires the completion of the configuration steps shown in Scenario 1 in addition to the configuration steps explained below. https://www.peplink.com 315 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Additional configurations for Cellular Routers Step 1. Disable the DHCP server.
HD Dome 1 should act as a DHCP server. HD Dome 2 should be configured to have a static IP address with DHCP disabled. Both routers should be in the same subnet (e.g. 192.168.50.1 and 192.168.50.2). 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then Network Settings (Left-side tab), and click on Untagged LAN . This will open up the LAN settings page. 2. Change the IP address to 192.168.50.2. 3. In the DHCP Server section, uncheck the checkbox to disable DHCP Server. 4. Click Save and Apply Changes . Step 2. Ethernet port configuration The Ethernet port must be set to ACCESS mode for each HD Dome. To do this, dummy VLANs need to be created first. 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then Network Settings (Left-side tab), and click on New LAN . This will open the settings page to create a dummy VLAN. 2. The image below shows the values that need to be changed to create a new VLAN:
Note : set different IP addresses for each HD dome (e.g. 192.168.10.1 and 192.168.10.2). https://www.peplink.com 316 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 3. Click Save and Apply Changes . 4. Go to Network (Top tab), then Port Settings (Left-side tab). 5. Set the Port Type to Access and set VLAN to Untagged LAN (see picture below). 6. Click Save and Apply Changes . Configuration requirements for the main Router Requirements for the main router are:
Configure WAN 1 as a DHCP client. WAN 1 will automatically get the Gateway IP address from HD Dome 1. Configure WAN 2 as a Static IP and set it to 192.168.50.12. Configure WAN 2 Gateway to 192.168.50.2. Same as the HD Dome 2s IP address. https://www.peplink.com 317 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 3: SIM Injector in LAN of main Router and multiple Cellular Routers Setup topology In this scenario, SIMs are provided to the HD Domes via the main router. In this example, the Remote SIM Proxy functionality needs to be enabled on the main router. Notes:
HD Dome can be replaced with any other cellular router that supports RemoteSIM. It is recommended to use Peplink Balance series or X series routers as the main router. https://www.peplink.com 318 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This scenario requires the completion of the configuration steps for the cellular router and the SIM Injector as in Scenario 1. The configuration for the main router is explained below. Main Router configuration IMPORTANT: Main router LAN side and Cellular Routers must be configured using different subnets, e.g. 192.168. 50 .1/24 and 192.168. 100 .1/24. Note : please make sure the Peplink router is running Firmware 8.1.0 or above. 1. Open the main router WEB interface and change:
From <IP address>/cgi-bin/MANGA/ index.cgi to <IP address>/cgi-bin/MANGA/ support.cgi . This will open the support.cgi page. 2. Scroll down to find Remote SIM Proxy and click on [click to configure] that is located next to it. 3. Check the Enable checkbox. 4. Click on Save . 5. Go back to the index.cgi page and click on Apply Changes . https://www.peplink.com 319 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Scenario 4: SIM Injector in a remote location Setup topology Requirements for installing a SIM Injector in a remote location:
Cellular router communicates with the SIM Injector via UDP port 50000. Therefore this port must be reachable via public IP over the Internet. The one way latency between the cellular router and the SIM Injector should be up to 250 ms. A higher latency may lead to stability issues. The cellular router must have Internet connection to connect to the SIM Injector. It can be another Internet connection via Ethernet or Fiber if possible, or a secondary cellular interface with a local SIM (Ignite SIM). Due to its high latency, it is not recommended to use satellite WAN for connecting to a SIM Injector in remote locations. SIM Injector configuration is the same as in Scenario 1. Cellular Router configuration Step 1. Enable the SIM Injector communication protocol. 1a. For a Balance cellular router, go to the Network (Top tab). 1b. For a MAX cellular router, go to the Advanced (Top tab). https://www.peplink.com 320 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
1 2 3 4 | User Manual-3 | Users Manual | 3.87 MiB | May 26 2023 |
2. Under Misc. settings (Left-side tab), find Remote SIM Management . 3. In Remote SIM Management , click on the edit icon next to Remote SIM is Disabled. 4. Enter the public IP of the SIM Injector and click Save and Apply Changes . Notes:
Do NOT check Auto LAN Discovery. Do NOT add a SIM Injector serial number to the Remote SIM Host field. Step 2. RemoteSIM and custom SIM card settings configurations are the same as in Scenario 1. https://www.peplink.com 321 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink How to check if a Pepwave Cellular Router supports Remote SIM 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then WAN (Left-side tab), and click Details on any cellular WAN. This will open the WAN Connection Settings page. 2. Scroll down to Cellular settings . If you can see the Remote SIM Settings section, then the cellular router supports Remote SIMs. Monitor the status of the Remote SIM 1. Go to Network (Top tab), then WAN (Left-side tab), and click Details on the cellular WAN which was configured to use RemoteSIM. 2. Check the WAN Connection Status section. Within the cell WAN details, there is a section for Remote SIM (SIM card IMSI, SIM Injector serial number and SIM slot). https://www.peplink.com 322 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix C: Overview of ports used by Peplink SD-WAN routers and other Peplink services Default Port Number Usage UDP 5246 Data flow TCP 443 HTTPS service TCP 5246 Optional, used when TCP 443 is not responding Service InControl InControl Inbound/Outbound Outbound Outbound Default Status Enabled Enabled InControl Outbound Enabled TCP 5246 Remote Web Admin TCP 4500 VPN Data (TCP Mode) TCP 32015 VPN handshake UDP 4500 VPN Data UDP 32015 VPN Data (alternative) TCP/UDP 4500+N-1^
VPN Sub-Tunnels Data InControl Virtual Appliance SpeedFusion VPN /
SpeedFusion SpeedFusion VPN /
SpeedFusion SpeedFusion VPN /
SpeedFusion SpeedFusion VPN /
SpeedFusion SpeedFusion VPN /
SpeedFusion UDP 32015+N-1^
VPN Sub-Tunnels Data
(alternative) SpeedFusion VPN /
SpeedFusion UDP 4500 VPN Data UDP 500 VPN initiation UDP 500 L2TP UDP 1701 L2TP UDP 4500 L2TP UDP 1194 OpenVPN IP 47 PPTP (GRE) IPsec IPsec Remote User Access Remote User Access Remote User Access Remote User Access Remote User Access Outbound Enabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound / Outbound*
Disabled Inbound Disabled Inbound Disabled Inbound Disabled Inbound Disabled Inbound Disabled TCP 2222 TCP 80 Remote Assistance Direct connection Peplink Troubleshooting Assistance Outbound HTTP traffic Web Admin Inbound Enabled Enabled https://www.peplink.com 323 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink TCP 443 HTTPS traffic Interface access Web Admin Interface access
(secure) TCP 8822 SSH SSH Inbound Inbound UDP 161 UDP 162 SNMP Get SNMP Trap SNMP monitoring Inbound SNMP monitoring Outbound TCP, UDP 1812 Radius Authentication Radius TCP, UDP 1813 Radius Accounting Radius UDP 123 Network Time Protocol NTP TCP 60660 Real-time location data in NMEA format GPS Outbound Outbound Inbound Outbound Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Outbound Disabled Disclaimer:
By default, only TCP 32015 and UDP 4500 are needed for SpeedFusion VPN / SpeedFusion. Inbound / Outbound* - Inbound = For Server mode; Outbound = For Client mode UDP 32015 - If IPsec VPN or L2TP/IPsec RUA is enabled, the UDP 4500 is occupied, so SpeedFusion VPN / SpeedFusion will automatically switch to UPD 32015 as VPN data port . UDP 32015+N-1^ / TCP/UDP 4500+N-1^ - When using Sub-Tunnels, multiple ports are in use (1 for each Sub-Tunnel profile). The default UDP data ports used when using (N number of Sub-Tunnel profiles) are:
45004500+N-1, or (when port 4500 is in use by IPsec or L2TP/IPsec) 32015 32015+N-1". https://www.peplink.com 324 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Appendix D: Declaration FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 Mini This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement (for MAX BR1 mini) This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. https://www.peplink.com 325 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Mini for EC25-E) https://www.peplink.com 326 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 327 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 16.38 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 328 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Mini for MC7455) https://www.peplink.com 329 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 330 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 16.38 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 331 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Industry Canada Statement (for MAX BR1 Mini) This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique le fonctionnement. compromettre susceptible brouillage meme subi, d'en est le si This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. https://www.peplink.com 332 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC & IC Requirements for Operation in the United States and Canada (for MAX BR1 Mini) FCC ID : U8G-P1930LITER6 FCC 15.21: The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. RF exposure warning: This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions and the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provide with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. IC Warning:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelect rique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. https://www.peplink.com 333 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Informations concernant l'exposition aux frequences radio (RF) equipement Cet environnement noncontrole. est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations IC definies pour un Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateuret votre corps. Cet emetteur ne doit pas etre co-localisees ou operant en conjonction avec une autreantenne ou transmetteur. Les utilisateurs finaux et les installateurs doivent etre informes des instructions d'installation de l'antenne et des conditions de fonctionnement de l'emetteur afin de satisfaire a la conformite d'exposition RF. This radio transmitter IC 20682-P1930LITER6 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le present emetteur radio 20682-P1930LITER6 a ete approuve par Innovation, Sciences et Developpement economique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne enumeres ci dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, et dont le gain est superieur au gain maximal indique pour tout type figurant sur la liste, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'emetteur. antenna type Omni-directional antenna gain 5.33 https://www.peplink.com 334 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 MK2 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 24cm between the radiator & your body. Industry Canada Statement (For MAX BR1 MK2) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio https://www.peplink.com 335 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. https://www.peplink.com 336 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 MK2 ) https://www.peplink.com 337 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 338 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.95 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.73 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 339 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 Classic This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. FCC Radiation Exposure Statement (for MAX BR1 Classic ) This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. https://www.peplink.com 340 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Industry Canada Statement ( for MAX BR1 Classic ) This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This device may not cause interference; and(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. https://www.peplink.com 341 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Classic for MC7455) https://www.peplink.com 342 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 343 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.78 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 344 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Classic for EC25-E) https://www.peplink.com 345 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 346 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.78 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 347 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX HD4 MBX, MAX HD2 MBX, MAX HD4 MBX 5G, MAX HD2 MBX 5G This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. IMPORTANT NOTE FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Any Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. ISED Warning Statement For MAX HD4 MBX Industry Canada Statement This device complies with Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This device may not cause interference; and(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. https://www.peplink.com 348 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada.
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. IC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada RF exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated to ensure a minimum of 20 cm spacing to any person at all times. Declaration d'exposition aux radiations Cet equipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC etablies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. This radio transmitter 20682-P1MBX has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type Replacement Antenna WIFI Antenna gain 2.4GHz / 2.44 dBi , 5GH / 4.73 dBi LTE Antenna type Replacement Antenna LTE Antenna gain 4.38 dBi https://www.peplink.com 349 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Battery Caution Statement (MAX HD4 MBX, MAX HD2 MBX, MAX HD4 MBX 5G, MAX HD2 MBX 5G) Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. https://www.peplink.com 350 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD4 MBX For EM7565 ) https://www.peplink.com 351 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 352 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.6 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 19.4 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 353 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD4 MBX For EM7565 ) https://www.peplink.com 354 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 355 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD2 MBX / MAX HD4 MBX For LM960A18) https://www.peplink.com 356 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 357 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.6 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 19.4 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 358 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD2 MBX / MAX HD4 MBX For LM960A18) https://www.peplink.com 359 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 360 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers (MAX HD2 MBX 5G / MAX HD4 MBX 5G For MV31-W) https://www.peplink.com 361 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 362 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.6 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 19.4 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 363 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers (MAX HD2 MBX 5G / MAX HD4 MBX 5G For MV31-W) https://www.peplink.com 364 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 365 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX HD2 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 50 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX HD2) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den https://www.peplink.com 366 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 37cm between the radiator & your body. 70 cm minimum distance for the device operate with plug-in USB cellular device which has maximum of 7W(ERP) output power. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 37 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Distance minimale de 70 cm pour que l'appareil fonctionne avec un appareil cellulaire USB enfichable qui a une puissance de sortie maximale de 7 W (ERP). Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. https://www.peplink.com 367 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 368 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD2 For MC7455) https://www.peplink.com 369 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 370 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.90 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.88 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 371 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD2 For EM7565) https://www.peplink.com 372 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 373 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.86 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.68 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 374 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Mounting the Unit Wall Mount Some devices can be wall mounted using screws. After adding the screw on the wall, slide in the screw hole socket as indicated below. Recommended screw specification M3.5 x 20mm, head diameter 6mm, head thickness 2.4mm. For type 1, the device requires four screws for wall mounting. For type 2, the device requires two screws for wall mounting. https://www.peplink.com 375 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
( For MAX BR1 Classic CB IEC 62368-1 ) Output of the external power source shall complied with ES1 and ES2 requirements, output rating 10-30 Vdc, minimum 12W ( DC Jack or POE injector ), with minimum ambient temperature 65 , altitude =
5000m , and evaluated in accordance to UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 and / or UL/EN/IEC 62368-1 Ensure to connect the power cord of power adapter to a socket-outlet with earthing.
( For MAX BR1 Mini HW3 CB IEC 62368-1 ) Output of the external power source shall complied with ES1 and PS2 requirements, input rating 10-30 Vdc, maximum 18W ( DC Power Port) or 802.3at PoE, with minimum ambient temperature 65 , altitude = 5000m , and evaluated in accordance to UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 and / or UL/EN/IEC 62368-1. Ensure to connect the power cord of power adapter to a socket-outlet with earthing. The MAX BR1 Mini is investigated to IEC TR 62102 as SELV (ES1) circuits and only connected to PoE without routing to the outside plant, including campus environment. https://www.peplink.com 376 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 Pro 5G FCC 15.21 The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. RF exposure warning This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions and the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 23 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provide with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. https://www.peplink.com 377 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Industry Canada Statement ( MAX BR1 Pro 5G ) This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.Informations concernant l'exposition aux frequences radio (RF) Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations IC definies pour un environnement noncontrole. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 23 cm entre le radiateuret votre corps. Cet emetteur ne doit pas etre co-localisees ou operant en conjonction avec une autreantenne ou transmetteur. Les utilisateurs finaux et les installateurs doivent etre informes des instructions d'installation de l'antenne et des conditions de fonctionnement de l'emetteur afin de satisfaire a la conformite d'exposition RF. This radio transmitter IC 20682-P1AX02 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. antenna type Omni-directional antenna gain for 2.4GHz 2.44 dBi https://www.peplink.com 378 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink antenna gain for 5GHz ( 5150 ~ 5250 MHz ) 4.10 dBi antenna gain for 5GHz ( 5725 ~ 5850 MHz ) 4.73 dBi Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. https://www.peplink.com 379 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Pro 5G) https://www.peplink.com 380 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 381 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.74 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.66 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 382 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Pro 5G) https://www.peplink.com 383 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 384 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Pro LTEA for EM7690) https://www.peplink.com 385 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 386 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 2472 MHz ) : 19.74 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.66 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 387 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Pro LTEA for EM7690) https://www.peplink.com 388 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 389 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 Mini Core This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation . Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement ( MAX BR1 Mini Core ) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le present produit est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables a l'innovation, Science et Developpement economique Canada. https://www.peplink.com 390 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. https://www.peplink.com 391 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 Mini HW3 (FCC ID: U8G-P1MT01) Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX BR1 Mini, IC: 20682-P1MT01) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. https://www.peplink.com 392 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex-empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; (detachable antenna only) ; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(iii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii)Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(iii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation https://www.peplink.com 393 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink point point et non point point. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with ISED RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Cet appareil doit tre install et utilis avec une distance minimale de 20cm entre lmetteuret votre corps. Cet appareil et sa ou ses antennes ne doivent pas tre co-localiss ou fonctionner en conjonction avec tout autre antenne ou transmetteur. This radio transmitter IC: 20682-P1MT01 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type: Omni-directional WIFI Antenna gain: 2.4GHz / 3.15 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 3.29 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.76 dBi Cet metteur radio IC : 20682-P1MT01 a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antennes rpertoris ci-dessous, avec le gain maximal autoris indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour tout type rpertori sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Type d'antenne WIFI : omnidirectionnelle Gain de l'antenne Wi-Fi : 2.4 GHz / 3.15 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 3.29 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.76 dBi https://www.peplink.com 394 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Mini HW3 for EC25-E & LN920A6-WW ) https://www.peplink.com 395 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 396 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.95 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.65 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) EC25-E module:
LN920A6-WW module:
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 397 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 Mini HW3 for EC25-E & LN920A6-WW ) https://www.peplink.com 398 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 399 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink NCC statement For MAX BR1 Mini (HW3) MPE: 0.9 mW/cm2: 0.118 mW/cm2 20
(FDD)
- WCDMA 2100 (Band 1) FDDLTE1920MHz -1980MHz \ 2110MHz
-2170MHz
- WCDMA 900 (Band 8) FDDLTE1885MHz -915MHz \ 930MHz -960MHz
- LTE 2100 (Band 1) FDDLTE1920MHz -1980MHz \ 2110MHz -2170MHz
- LTE 1800 (Band 3) FDDLTE1710MHz -1770MHz \ 1805MHz -1865MHz
- LTE 2600 (Band 7) FDDLTE2500MHz2570MHz \ 2620MHz2690MHz
- LTE 900 (Band 8) FDDLTE885MHz -915MHz \ 930MHz -960MHz
- LTE 700 (Band 28) FDDLTE703MHz -748MHz \ 758MHz -803MHz
(TDD)
- LTE 2600 (Band 38) TDD(2570MHz2620MHz)
- LTE 2600 (Band 41) TDD(2500MHz2690MHz) https://www.peplink.com 400 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX 700 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 22 centimeters between the radiator and your body. https://www.peplink.com 401 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For MAX HD2 IP67, MAX HD2 Mini, MAX HD2 Dome, MAX HD4 IP67, MAX BR1 ENT, MAX BR1 M2M, SpeedFusion Engine Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX HD2 IP67, MAX HD2 Mini, MAX HD2 Dome, MAX HD4 IP67, MAX BR1 ENT, MAX BR1 M2M, SpeedFusion Engine) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le present produit est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Developpement economique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. https://www.peplink.com 402 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Battery Caution Statement (MAX HD2 IP67 , MAX HD2 Mini , MAX HD1 Dome, MAX HD2 Dome, MAX HD4 IP67 , MAX BR1 ENT ) Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. https://www.peplink.com 403 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD2 IP67 ) https://www.peplink.com 404 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 405 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 406 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD1 Dome ) https://www.peplink.com 407 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 408 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 409 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD1 Dome ) https://www.peplink.com 410 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 411 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD2 Dome ) https://www.peplink.com 412 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 413 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 414 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 ESN ) https://www.peplink.com 415 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 416 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.78 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 417 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX HD4 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 40 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX HD4) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le present produit est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Developpement economique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex- empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes https://www.peplink.com 418 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en
(i) The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est reserve uniquement pour une utilisation a l'interieur afin de reduire les risques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer a la limitation P.I.R.E specifiee pour l'exploitation point a point et non point a point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 40cm between the radiator & your body. Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED definies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 40 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Battery Caution Statement (MAX HD4) Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. https://www.peplink.com 419 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD4 ) https://www.peplink.com 420 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 421 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 18.87 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz & 5725 - 5850 MHz ) : 19.13 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 422 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD4 IP67 ) https://www.peplink.com 423 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 424 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 425 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( SpeedFusion Engine ) https://www.peplink.com 426 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 427 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) MC7455 module:
EC25-E module:
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 428 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX Transit, MAX Transit Duo Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 24 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX Transit, MAX Transit Duo) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le present produit est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device. https://www.peplink.com 429 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex- empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est reserve uniquement pour une utilisation a l'interieur afin de reduire les risques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer a la limitation P.I.R.E specifiee pour l'exploitation point a point et non point a point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 30cm between the radiator & your body. Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED definies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 30 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Battery Caution Statement Risk of explosion if the battery replaced by an incorrect type, place the battery into fire, a hot oven, extremely high temperature or low air pressure surrounding environment, the leakage of flammable liquid or gas, and mechanically crushing or cutting of the battery. https://www.peplink.com 430 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX Transit / MAX Transit Duo For EM7565 ) https://www.peplink.com 431 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 432 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 18.68 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 18.19 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 433 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX Transit For LM960A18 ) https://www.peplink.com 434 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 435 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 18.68 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 18. 1 9 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 436 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX Transit Mini Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX Transit Mini) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Ce produit rpond aux spcifications techniques applicables l'innovation, Science et Dveloppement conomique Canada. Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. https://www.peplink.com 437 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This radio transmitter has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Antenna types Replacement Antenna Antenna gain (in dBi) 5.33 dBi Innovation, Sciences et Developpement economique Canada a approuve l'utilisation de ce transmetteur radio avec les types d'antenne enumeres ci-dessous, le gain maximal admissible etant indique. Les types d'antennes non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain superieur au gain maximal indique pour tout type liste sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Types d'antennes Replacement Antenna Gain d'antenne (en dBi) 5.33 dBi https://www.peplink.com 438 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX Transit Mini ) https://www.peplink.com 439 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 440 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.78 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator & your body. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 441 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 PRO, UBR LTE Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 23 centimeters between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX BR1 PRO, UBR LTE) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex- empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den https://www.peplink.com 442 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink For licence exempt equipment with detachable antennas, the user manual shall also contain the following notice in a conspicuous location:
This radio transmitter 20682-P1941 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type: Replacement Antenna WIFI Antenna gain: 2.4GHz I 2.44 dBi , 5GHz I 4.73 dBi LTE Antenna type: Replacement Antenna (04-410055-00) LTE Antenna gain: 4 dBi LTE Antenna type: Replacement Antenna (04-410093-01) LTE Antenna gain: 4.38 dBi
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate;
(detachable antenna only) ; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(iii) where applicable, antenna type(s), antenna models(s), and worst-case tilt angle(s) necessary to remain compliant with the e.i.r.p. elevation mask requirement set forth in section 6.2.2.3 shall be clearly indicated.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est reserve uniquement pour utilisation a l'interieur afin de reduire les risques de brouillage prejudiciable aux systemes de satellites mobiles utilisant les memes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. (antenne dtachable uniquement) En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(iii) En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi etre avises que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont designes utilisateurs principaux (c.-a-d., qu'ils ont la priorite) pour les bande 5725-5850 MHz et https://www.peplink.com 443 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Radiation Exposure Statement This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 23 cm between the radiator & your body. Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED definies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 23 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. https://www.peplink.com 444 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 PRO / UBR LTE ) https://www.peplink.com 445 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 446 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.94 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 20.34 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 447 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR1 IP55, MAX BR2 IP55 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if it is not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body. https://www.peplink.com 448 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR1 IP55 ) https://www.peplink.com 449 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 450 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 18.16 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz) : 20.32 dBm 5GHz ( 5725 - 5850 MHz) : 13.00 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 50cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 451 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR2 IP55 ) https://www.peplink.com 452 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 453 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 18.99 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.95 dBm 5GHz ( 5725 - 5850 MHz ) : 12.80 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 50cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 454 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX Transit Pro E / MAX Transit LTEA (FCC ID: U8G-P1835) FCC 15.21:
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. FCC 15.105 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. RF exposure warning This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with provided instructions and the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. https://www.peplink.com 455 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink ICES Statement This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den RF exposure warning This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Cet quipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le radiateur et votre corps. Cet metteur ne doit pas tre colocalises ou oprant en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou transmetteur. https://www.peplink.com 456 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This radio transmitter IC: 20682-P1835 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. https://www.peplink.com 457 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Cet metteur radio IC : 20682-P1835 a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada doit fonctionner avec les types d'antennes numrs ci-dessous, avec le gain maximal admissible indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour tout type rpertori sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. https://www.peplink.com 458 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX Transit Pro E (FCC ID: U8G-P1AX09) Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX Transit Pro E, IC: 20682-P1AX09) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. https://www.peplink.com 459 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex-empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; (detachable antenna only) ; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(iii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(iii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation https://www.peplink.com 460 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink point point et non point point. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with ISED RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Cet appareil doit tre install et utilis avec une distance minimale de 20cm entre lmetteuret votre corps. Cet appareil et sa ou ses antennes ne doivent pas tre co-localiss ou fonctionner en conjonction avec tout autre antenne ou transmetteur. This radio transmitter IC: 20682-P1AX09 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type: Omni-directional WIFI Antenna gain: 2.4GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.10 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi Cet metteur radio IC : 20682-P1AX09 a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antennes rpertoris ci-dessous, avec le gain maximal autoris indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour tout type rpertori sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Type d'antenne WIFI : omnidirectionnelle Gain de l'antenne Wi-Fi : 2.4 GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.10 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi https://www.peplink.com 461 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX Transit Pro E for LN920A12-WW) https://www.peplink.com 462 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 463 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.97 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.99 dBm LN920A12-WW: WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 464 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX Transit Duo Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX Transit Duo Pro) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, https://www.peplink.com 465 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex-empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; (detachable antenna only) ; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(iii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(iii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation https://www.peplink.com 466 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink point point et non point point. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with ISED RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Cet appareil doit tre install et utilis avec une distance minimale de 20cm entre lmetteuret votre corps. Cet appareil et sa ou ses antennes ne doivent pas tre co-localiss ou fonctionner en conjonction avec tout autre antenne ou transmetteur. This radio transmitter IC: 20682-P1AX11 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type: Omni-directional WIFI Antenna gain: 2.4GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.1 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi Cet metteur radio IC : 20682-P1AX11 a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antennes rpertoris ci-dessous, avec le gain maximal autoris indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour tout type rpertori sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Type d'antenne WIFI : omnidirectionnelle Gain de l'antenne Wi-Fi : 2.4 GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.1 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi https://www.peplink.com 467 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX Transit Duo Pro for EM7421 & EM12-G ) https://www.peplink.com 468 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 469 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.74 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.88 dBm EM7421: WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) EM12-G: WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 470 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX Transit Duo Pro for EM7421 & EM12-G ) https://www.peplink.com 471 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 472 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX BR2 Pro Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Industry Canada Statement (MAX BR2 Pro, IC: 20682-P1AX203) This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical specifications. Le prsent produit est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables d'Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada. This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canadas licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to https://www.peplink.com 473 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio ex-empts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den
(i) The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potent for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
(ii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as appropriate; (detachable antenna only) ; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band 5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices.
(iii) For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate.
(i) Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
(ii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5725-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL.
(iii) Le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation https://www.peplink.com 474 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink point point et non point point. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with ISED RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Cet appareil doit tre install et utilis avec une distance minimale de 20cm entre lmetteuret votre corps. Cet appareil et sa ou ses antennes ne doivent pas tre co-localiss ou fonctionner en conjonction avec tout autre antenne ou transmetteur. This radio transmitter IC: 20682-P1AX203 has been approved by Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list that have a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for any type listed are strictly prohibited for use with this device. WIFI Antenna type: Omni-directional WIFI Antenna gain: 2.4GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.1 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi Cet metteur radio IC : 20682-P1AX203 a t approuv par Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antennes rpertoris ci-dessous, avec le gain maximal autoris indiqu. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont un gain suprieur au gain maximum indiqu pour tout type rpertori sont strictement interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. Type d'antenne WIFI : omnidirectionnelle Gain de l'antenne Wi-Fi : 2.4 GHz / 2.44 dBi 5150 ~ 5250 MHz / 4.1 dBi 5725 ~ 5850 MHz / 4.73 dBi https://www.peplink.com 475 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR2 Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 476 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 477 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.94 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.96 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 478 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX BR2 Pro ) https://www.peplink.com 479 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 480 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( UBR Plus ) https://www.peplink.com 481 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 482 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.84 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 22.76 dBm WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 483 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( UBR Plus ) https://www.peplink.com 484 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 485 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink FCC Requirements for Operation in the United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance Notice:
For MAX HD1 Dome Pro, MAX HD2 Dome Pro (FCC ID: U8G-P1AX13) Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. https://www.peplink.com 486 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink CE Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD1 Dome Pro for MV31-W ) https://www.peplink.com 487 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 488 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink 2.4GHz ( 2412 - 2472 MHz ) : 19.90 dBm 5GHz ( 5150 - 5250 MHz ) : 29.84 dBm MV31-W: WWAN : Refer 3GPP TS 36.521 -1 ( UE Power class ) This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm between the radiator & your body. This equipment is restricted to indoor use only when operating in the 5150 to 5250 MHz frequency range in above countries. contact as: https://www.peplink.com/
https://www.peplink.com 489 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink UK Statement for Pepwave Routers ( MAX HD1 Dome Pro for MV31-W ) https://www.peplink.com 490 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink https://www.peplink.com 491 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink USB WAN Modem Port Specification MAX Series MAX 700 MAX HD2 /
MAX HD2 Media Fast MAX HD2 Mini MAX HD2 /
HD4 MBX MAX BR1 ENT MAX HD4 / MAX HD4 Media Fast
/ MediaFast 200 MAX BR2 Pro Output Rating 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 0.5A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A 5V DC, 2A https://www.peplink.com 492 Copyright @ 2021 Peplink
1 2 3 4 | ID Label and Location | ID Label/Location Info | 188.43 KiB | May 26 2023 |
Model: MAX HD1 Dome Pro pepiink Product Code: MAX-HD1-DOM-PRO-5GH Serial No.:293C-0550-2D60 LAN MAC:A8-C0-EA-A9-63-00 AP Password:EAA96300 FCC ID: U8G-P1AX13 Made in Taiwan Contains FCC ID: N7NEM91 M8 HW1 Model: MAX HD2 Dome Pro pepiink Product Code: MAX-HD2-DOM-PRO-LTEA-Q SI C UK Serial No.:293C-3D95-D932 = cA LAN MAC:A8-CO-EA-B0-6B-AO AP Password:EABO6BA0O FCC ID: U8G-P1AX13 Made in Taiwan Contains FCC ID: RITLN920 Ms HW1 Default Access Password: ad
1 2 3 4 | Agent Designation Attestation | Attestation Statements | 398.79 KiB | October 05 2023 |
Certification designating a U.S. Agent for service of process:
As required by section 2.911(d)(7), the applicant must designate a contact located in the United States for purposes of acting as the applicants agent for service of process, regardless of whether the applicant is a domestic or foreign entity. An applicant located in the United States may designate itself as the agent for service of process. In either scenario, the designation of the U.S. agent for service of process should be provided as an attachment to the equipment authorization application. The applicant must provide a written certification, which must:
i. Be signed by both the applicant and designated agent for service of process, if the agent is different from the applicant. ii. Acknowledge the applicants consent and the designated agents obligation to accept service of process. iii. Provide a physical U.S. address and email for the designated agent. iv. Acknowledge the applicants acceptance to maintain an agent for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. Unofficial information provided by FCC personnel on February 14, 2023, via the monthly call with the TCB Council:
The Agent for Process of Service:
cannot be a TCB or affiliated with a TCB (e.g. could not be a person who works for a TCB or a company that owns or is owned by the TCB) cannot be a [FCC recognised] Lab or affiliated with a test lab (e.g. could not be a person who works for a Lab or a company that owns or is owned by the Lab) Agent can be Individual Entity or a Company Entity Agent Entity must be located in US, US address/phone Entity acting as Agent must have FRN (best practice, put FRN on Agent Letter) Agent letter does not have to be FCC ID specific, can be general Agent for Grantee For devices being marketed or for which marketing has ceased for less than 1 year, if the Agent for Process of Service changes, then for every TC Number the TCB must request the FCC to put application into Audit Mode and Agent Letter needs to be updated (superseded). NOTE: The U.S. Agent for Service of Process should not be confused with the authorized agent used for signing the 731 form, other cover letters within the application, and/or the agent who may interface with the TCB. PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road, Cheung Sha Wan, Hong Kong U.S. Agent Designation for Service of Process ATTENTION: Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA REGARDING: FCC Certification Section 2.911(d)(7) Information Designated U.S. Agent Company Name: Approve-IT, Inc. Contact Name: Nathan Grinager Street Address: 8011 34th Ave South, Suite 342 City/Province/Zip: Bloomington, MN 55425 Telephone No: 651-247-1678 Email: team@approve-it.net FRN #: 0027533835 This letter is to confirm that we (the Designated U.S. Agent) have accepted the responsibility to act as the Designated U.S. Agent for Service of Process as required by section 47 CFR 2.911(d)(7) on behalf of the Applicant noted below. U.S. Agent Signature:
Date:
March 13, 2023 Signed by (Printed Name/Title): Nathan Grinager / Co-President
*This letter must be dated within 1-year (update if other terms apply) of the date the application is submitted to the TCB for device certification The Applicant confirms its explicit consent and acknowledges that they must maintain an agent for no less than one year after terminating all marketing and importation OR the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. The applicant further acknowledges their responsibility to inform the FCC whenever the Designated U.S. Agent information above changes. Applicant Company name:
Grantee Code: U8G Contact Name: Antony Chong Street Address: A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road, City/Province/Zip: Cheung Sha Wan, Hong Kong Telephone No: 85229907600 Email: cert-team@peplink.com PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED Applicant Signature:
Date: 3/9/2023 Signed by (Printed Name/Title): Antony Chong / Director of Hardware Engineering
1 2 3 4 | C2PC Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 743.74 KiB | October 05 2023 |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road, Cheung Sha Wan, Hong Kong Declaration of Class II Permissive Change Date: 9/18/2023 To Whom It May Concern:
The purpose of this letter is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: U8G-
P1AX13, originally granted on 05/26/2023. The major change filed under this application is change software settings to reduce the power of UNII-1. Signature
Name/Title: Antony Chong / Director of Hardware Engineering TEL: +852 2990 7600 FAX: +852 3007 0588 Email: antonyc@peplink.com
1 2 3 4 | Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 1.26 MiB | October 05 2023 |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road, Cheung Sha Wan, Hong Kong Tel: +852 2990 7600; Fax: +852 3007 0588 Date: September 18, 2023 Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division 7435 Oakland Mills Rd Columbia MD 21046-1609 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: U8G-P1AX13 To Whom It May Concern, Long Term Confidentiality Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby respectfully request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:
KDB 594280 D02 SW Security The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. We understand that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. _____________________ Antony Chong Director of Hardware Engineering antonyc@peplink.com
1 2 3 4 | Covered List Attestation Letter | Attestation Statements | 156.47 KiB | October 05 2023 |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED Covered Equipment Certification Attestation Letter 9/18/2023 Nemko North America, Inc. 303 River Road Ottawa K1V 1H2 Canada ATTN.: Reviewing Engineer FCC ID: U8G-P1AX13 PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED (the applicant) certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Note: If the equipment for which the applicant seeks authorization is produced by any of the entities identified on the current Covered List, the applicant should include an explanation on why the equipment is not covered equipment. PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment. Signed:
Printed name: Antony Chong Title: Director of Hardware Engineering Company Name: PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED Date: 9/18/2023
1 2 3 4 | Declaration Letter WiFi Channels | Cover Letter(s) | 96.99 KiB | May 26 2023 |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED Date: May 9, 2023 We, PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED, declare that the device does not support channel 12 ~ 13 in 2.4GHz band and any non-US/Canada channels in all the operational mode(s) for the following product. FCC ID: U8G-P1AX13 If you should have any question(s) regarding this declaration, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!
Sincerely yours, Name: Antony Chong Title: Director of Hardware Engineering Company: PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED Tel: +852-2990-7600 Fax: +852 3007 0588 E-mail: antonyc@peplink.com
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2023-10-05 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2023-05-26 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
3 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
4 | 2023-05-25 | JAD - Part 15 Class A Digital Device |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 | Effective |
2023-10-05
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
2023-05-26
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
2023-05-25
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
PISMO LABS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0016347064
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Physical Address |
A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6, 481 Castle Peak Road
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
A8, 5/F, HK Spinners Industrial Building, Phase 6
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Cheung Sha Wan, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 |
Hong Kong
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Application Email Address |
v******@nemko.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Grantee Code |
U8G
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Product Code |
P1AX13
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
A******** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Title |
Director of Hardware Engineering
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
85229********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Fax Number |
85230********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
a******@peplink.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 3 4 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 4 | JAD - Part 15 Class A Digital Device | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Peplink Pepwave Wireless Product | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Grant Comments | Output power listed is conducted. This device has 20 MHz, 40MHz and 80 MHz bandwidth modes. The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter RF Exposure procedures. This device is approved with a certified licensed transmitter (FCC ID: N7NEM91 and FCC ID: RI7LN920). Class II Permissive Change: to reduce the output power of U-NII-1 band by software and address the relevant verification evaluation as documented in this filing. | ||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power listed is conducted. This device has 20 MHz and 40MHz bandwidth modes. The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter RF Exposure procedures. This device is approved with a certified licensed transmitter (FCC ID: N7NEM91 and FCC ID: RI7LN920). | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Output power listed is conducted. This device has 20 MHz, 40MHz and 80 MHz bandwidth modes. The antenna used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter RF Exposure procedures. This device is approved with a certified licensed transmitter (FCC ID: N7NEM91 and FCC ID: RI7LN920). | |||||
1 2 3 4 | This device is approved with a certified licensed transmitter (FCC ID: N7NEM91 and FCC ID: RI7LN920). | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 | Firm Name |
SPORTON International Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Name |
A****** C****
|
||||
1 2 3 4 | Telephone Number |
+886-******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 |
a******@sporton.com.tw
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.2992 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.257 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3365000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.2992 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 2 | 15E | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.257 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15B | CC |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC